WO2020202812A1 - Drive motor, image shake correction device, and imaging device - Google Patents

Drive motor, image shake correction device, and imaging device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020202812A1
WO2020202812A1 PCT/JP2020/005294 JP2020005294W WO2020202812A1 WO 2020202812 A1 WO2020202812 A1 WO 2020202812A1 JP 2020005294 W JP2020005294 W JP 2020005294W WO 2020202812 A1 WO2020202812 A1 WO 2020202812A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
drive motor
image
arrangement
coil
unit
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2020/005294
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
康治 宇川
勝也 藤井
昌広 鮒子田
Original Assignee
ソニー株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by ソニー株式会社 filed Critical ソニー株式会社
Priority to JP2021511178A priority Critical patent/JP7484892B2/en
Publication of WO2020202812A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020202812A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B5/00Adjustment of optical system relative to image or object surface other than for focusing
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H02GENERATION; CONVERSION OR DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER
    • H02KDYNAMO-ELECTRIC MACHINES
    • H02K11/00Structural association of dynamo-electric machines with electric components or with devices for shielding, monitoring or protection
    • H02K11/20Structural association of dynamo-electric machines with electric components or with devices for shielding, monitoring or protection for measuring, monitoring, testing, protecting or switching
    • H02K11/21Devices for sensing speed or position, or actuated thereby
    • H02K11/215Magnetic effect devices, e.g. Hall-effect or magneto-resistive elements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H02GENERATION; CONVERSION OR DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER
    • H02KDYNAMO-ELECTRIC MACHINES
    • H02K29/00Motors or generators having non-mechanical commutating devices, e.g. discharge tubes or semiconductor devices
    • H02K29/06Motors or generators having non-mechanical commutating devices, e.g. discharge tubes or semiconductor devices with position sensing devices
    • H02K29/08Motors or generators having non-mechanical commutating devices, e.g. discharge tubes or semiconductor devices with position sensing devices using magnetic effect devices, e.g. Hall-plates, magneto-resistors

Definitions

  • This technology relates to the technical field of a drive motor, an image blur correction device, and an image pickup device that generate a driving force by a magnetic circuit having a coil and a magnet.
  • Electronic devices and electric motors such as various image pickup devices represented by video cameras and still cameras have a plurality of coils and magnets located opposite to each other as a drive unit, and when a current is supplied to the coils.
  • a drive motor that generates a driving force (thrust) in relation to a magnet is used.
  • Such a drive motor is provided, for example, as a drive unit of an image blur correction device that corrects image blur by moving a lens in a direction orthogonal to the optical axis direction in an image pickup device.
  • the lens unit having the lens has a first direction and an optical axis which are axial directions of a first fulcrum axis orthogonal to the optical axis of the lens with respect to the outer casing.
  • Some lenses are rotatable in the second direction, which is the axial direction of the second fulcrum axis, which is orthogonal to the first fulcrum axis (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
  • the lens unit is rotated in the yawing direction with the first fulcrum axis as the fulcrum and is rotated in the pitching direction with the second fulcrum axis as the fulcrum to correct the image blur.
  • two drive motors (flat) each having a plurality of coils, magnets, and yokes as drive units for rotating the lens unit in the yawing direction and the pitching direction. Motor) is used.
  • a plurality of coils are arranged side by side in the axial direction (circumferential direction) of the fulcrum axis, and the magnets are magnetized with magnetic poles of N pole and S pole alternately in the axial direction (circumferential direction) of the fulcrum axis.
  • the axial direction of the output shaft of each drive motor coincides with the first fulcrum shaft and the second fulcrum shaft, respectively.
  • the drive motor is arranged so that the coil and the magnet face each other, and the lens unit is rotated in the yawing direction and the pitching direction by using the thrust generated in relation to the magnet when a current is supplied to the coil.
  • One drive motor is arranged on the upper surface side of the lens unit in a vertical direction, for example, so that when a current is supplied to the coil, the lens unit is rotated in the yawing direction according to the current supply direction. It is configured.
  • the other drive motor is arranged, for example, on the side surface side of the lens unit so as to face the left-right direction, and when a current is supplied to the coil, the lens unit is rotated in the pitching direction according to the current supply direction. It is configured.
  • the drive motor is provided with a magnetic detection element that detects the position of the magnet relative to the coil in the rotation direction, for example, a Hall element, and each part is controlled according to the detection result by the magnetic detection element.
  • a magnetic detection element that detects the position of the magnet relative to the coil in the rotation direction, for example, a Hall element, and each part is controlled according to the detection result by the magnetic detection element.
  • a magnetic detection element is arranged on a substrate, and a plurality of coils are arranged in a circumferential direction on the same substrate.
  • the drive motor has a substrate on which a circuit pattern is formed and has a coil arrangement portion, a winding portion formed in an annular shape, and a pair of connecting portions drawn out from the winding portion.
  • a plurality of coils arranged in the circumferential direction with the winding portion arranged in the coil arrangement portion, an annular magnet located facing the plurality of coils, and a relative of the magnet in the rotation direction with respect to the coil.
  • a magnetic detection element for detecting a specific position and a support shaft serving as a rotation fulcrum are provided, and both sides of the coil arrangement portion in the thickness direction are formed as a first arrangement surface and a second arrangement surface, respectively.
  • the coil is arranged on the first arrangement surface, and the magnetic detection element is arranged on the second arrangement surface.
  • a plurality of coils and magnetic detection elements are arranged on the first arrangement surface and the second arrangement surface, which are both sides in the thickness direction of the coil arrangement portion, respectively, and the magnetic detection elements are arranged on the first arrangement surface. Space is not required.
  • connection terminal portion is formed in the circuit pattern and the tip portion of the connection portion is connected to the connection terminal portion on the second arrangement surface.
  • connection portion passes through the outside of the outer peripheral surface of the coil arrangement portion and is folded back.
  • connection portion is connected to the connection terminal portion through the outside of the outer peripheral surface of the coil arrangement portion, so that it is not necessary to form an insertion hole for inserting the connection portion in the substrate.
  • the magnetic detection element is located between the connecting portions adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction.
  • connection part and the magnetic detection element are not aligned in the radial direction.
  • a bearing for rotatably supporting the support shaft is provided, and the bearing is formed by sintering.
  • a base yoke to which the magnet is attached and an arrangement hole in which the magnetic detection element is arranged are formed, and an opposing yoke located on the opposite side of the magnet with the coil arrangement portion interposed therebetween. It is desirable that an auxiliary yoke is provided which is attached to the facing yoke and covers the arrangement hole.
  • the placement hole is covered with the auxiliary yoke to form a closed magnetic path.
  • a flexible printed wiring board as the substrate, which has a conductive portion derived from the coil arrangement portion and extending in a predetermined direction.
  • the conductive portion is derived from the coil arrangement portion, the conductive portion can be positioned in a bendable state.
  • the blur correction device includes a lens unit that is rotated in at least one direction orthogonal to the optical axis of the lens with respect to the outer casing, and a drive motor that rotates the lens unit.
  • the drive motor has a substrate on which a circuit pattern is formed and has a coil arrangement portion, a winding portion formed in an annular shape, and a pair of connecting portions drawn out from the winding portion, and the winding portion is the coil.
  • a plurality of coils arranged in the circumferential direction while being arranged in the arrangement portion, an annular magnet located facing the plurality of coils, and a magnet that detects the position of the magnet relative to the coil in the rotation direction.
  • a detection element and a support shaft serving as a rotation fulcrum are provided, and both sides of the coil arrangement portion in the thickness direction are formed as a first arrangement surface and a second arrangement surface, respectively, and the winding portion is the first arrangement surface. It is arranged on the arrangement surface, and the magnetic detection element is arranged on the second arrangement surface.
  • a plurality of coils and magnetic detection elements are arranged on the first arrangement surface and the second arrangement surface, which are both sides in the thickness direction of the coil arrangement portion, respectively, and the magnetic detection element is arranged on the first arrangement surface. No space is required to place the.
  • the imaging apparatus includes a lens barrel that captures an optical image, an imaging element that converts the captured optical image into an electrical signal, and at least an imager orthogonal to the optical axis of the lens with respect to the outer casing.
  • the drive motor includes a lens unit that is rotated in one direction and a drive motor that rotates the lens unit.
  • the drive motor has a substrate on which a circuit pattern is formed and has a coil arrangement portion, and a winding portion formed in an annular shape. And a pair of connecting portions drawn out from the winding portion, and a plurality of coils arranged in the circumferential direction with the winding portion arranged in the coil arrangement portion, and positions facing the plurality of coils.
  • An annular magnet, a magnetic detection element that detects the position of the magnet relative to the coil in the rotation direction, and a support shaft serving as a rotation fulcrum are provided, and both sides of the coil arrangement portion in the thickness direction are provided. It is formed as a first arrangement surface and a second arrangement surface, the winding portion is arranged on the first arrangement surface, and the magnetic detection element is arranged on the second arrangement surface.
  • a plurality of coils and magnetic detection elements are arranged on the first arrangement surface and the second arrangement surface, which are both sides in the thickness direction of the coil arrangement portion, respectively, and the magnetic detection element is arranged on the first arrangement surface. No space is required to place the.
  • FIGS. 2 to 24 the drive motor, the blur correction device, and the image pickup device of the present technology are shown, and this figure is a perspective view of the image pickup device.
  • the present technology imaging device is applied to a video camera
  • the present technology image blur correction device is applied to the image blur correction device provided in this video camera
  • the present technology drive motor Is applied to the drive motor for driving this image blur correction device.
  • the applicable range of the image pickup device, the image blur correction device, and the drive motor of the present technology is limited to the drive motor for driving the image blur correction device and the image blur correction device provided in the video camera and the video camera, respectively. Absent.
  • the image pickup device, image blur correction device, and drive motor of the present technology are, for example, an image pickup device incorporated in various electronic devices such as a still camera, a mobile phone, and a mobile information terminal, or an image blur correction device provided in these image pickup devices. Alternatively, it can be widely applied to drive motors used in these electronic devices.
  • the applicable range of the drive motor according to the present technology is not limited.
  • a drive unit such as an openable mirror provided in a vehicle such as an automobile, a drive unit in a robot, a drive unit in a flying drone, and photography. It is also applied to the drive unit of a handy type device that is equipped with a mobile device with a function and has a movable part that can move in three axial directions, and the drive unit of a camera-integrated device that has a movable part that can move in three axial directions. It is possible.
  • the direction as seen from the photographer at the time of shooting with the video camera shall be indicated in the front-back, up-down, left-right directions. Therefore, the subject side is the front side and the photographer side is the rear side.
  • the lens shown below is meant to include both a lens composed of a single lens and a lens group composed of a plurality of lenses.
  • the image pickup apparatus 1 is formed by arranging necessary parts inside and outside the outer casing 2 (see FIGS. 1 and 2).
  • the outer housing 2 is formed, for example, in a case shape long in the front-rear direction, the front end portion is provided as the front panel portion 3, and the upper end portion at the rear end portion is provided as the storage case portion 4 opened rearward.
  • Microphones 5, 5 and interface covers 6 and operation switches 7 and 7 are arranged in order from the front side on the upper surface 2a of the outer casing 2.
  • the operation switches 7 and 7 are, for example, a zoom lever and a shooting button.
  • buttons 8, 8, ... Such as a power button and an image reproduction button are arranged on one side surface 2b of the outer casing 2.
  • a memory card 9 is mounted on one side surface 2b of the outer casing 2.
  • Operation buttons 10 and 10 such as a mode switching button and a recording button are arranged on the rear surface 2c of the outer casing 2.
  • a battery 11 is mounted on the rear surface 2c of the outer casing 2, and a part of the battery 11 projects rearward from the rear surface 2c of the outer casing 2.
  • a flash 12 is arranged at the upper end of the front panel portion 3.
  • the flash 12 is used for nighttime shooting and the like, and auxiliary light is emitted from the flash 12 toward the front.
  • a display unit 13 is rotatably and rotatably connected to the side surface of the outer casing 2.
  • the front end of the display 13 is connected to the outer casing 2 and has a display surface 13a.
  • a finder 14 is connected to the rear end of the image pickup device 1, and the finder 14 is slidable in the front-rear direction and rotatable in the tilt direction with respect to the storage case portion 4.
  • the finder 14 is slidable between a storage position in which the portion excluding the rear end is stored in the storage case 4 and a drawer position in which the finder 14 is pulled out from the storage case 4. Further, the finder 14 is rotatable in the tilt direction with the front end as a fulcrum at the drawer position.
  • An image blur correction device 15 is arranged inside the outer casing 2 (see FIGS. 3 to 5).
  • the image blur correction device 15 has an outer frame 16, an inner frame 17, a holding frame 18, and a lens unit 19.
  • the outer frame 16, the inner frame 17, and the holding frame 18 are formed in a frame shape as a whole.
  • the outer frame 16 is configured by connecting the first member 20 and the second member 21.
  • the first member 20 is composed of a first surface portion 22 facing in the vertical direction and a second surface portion 23 facing in the horizontal direction, and a right end portion of the first surface portion 22 and an upper end portion of the second surface portion 23 are continuous. ing.
  • a through hole 22a is formed in the central portion of the first surface portion 22.
  • the second surface portion 23 has a pair of pillar portions 24, 24 that are located in the front-rear direction and extend substantially vertically, and a continuous portion 25 that connects the lower end portions of the pillar portions 24, 24 and extends in the front-rear direction.
  • the second member 21 is composed of a first planar portion 26 facing in the vertical direction and a second planar portion 27 facing in the horizontal direction, and has a left end portion and a second planar portion of the first planar portion 26. The lower end of 27 is continuous.
  • a mounting hole 26a is formed in the central portion of the first planar portion 26.
  • An insertion arrangement hole 27a is formed in the central portion of the second planar portion 27.
  • the lower end of the second surface 23 of the first member 20 and the right end of the first surface 26 of the second member 21 are connected by screwing or the like, and the first surface of the first member 20 is connected.
  • the left end portion of 22 and the upper end portion of the second planar portion 27 of the second member 21 are connected by screwing or the like.
  • the inner frame 17 is arranged inside the outer frame 16, and is configured by connecting the first support member 28 and the second support member 29.
  • the first support member 28 is composed of a top surface portion 30 facing in the vertical direction and a right side surface portion 31 facing in the left-right direction, and the right end portion of the top surface portion 30 and the upper end portion of the right side surface portion 31 are continuous.
  • An insertion arrangement hole 30a is formed in the central portion of the top surface portion 30.
  • a through hole 31a is formed in the central portion of the right side surface portion 31.
  • the second support member 29 is composed of a bottom surface portion 32 facing in the vertical direction and a left side surface portion 33 facing in the left-right direction, and the left end portion of the bottom surface portion 32 and the lower end portion of the left side surface portion 33 are continuous.
  • a mounting hole 32a is formed in the central portion of the bottom surface portion 32.
  • a mounting hole 33a is formed in the central portion of the left side surface portion 33.
  • the lower end of the right side surface 31 of the first support member 28 and the right end of the bottom surface 32 of the second support member 29 are connected by screwing or the like to the left end of the top surface 30 of the first support member 28.
  • the second support member 29 is connected to the upper end of the left side surface 33 by screwing or the like.
  • the holding frame 18 is arranged inside the inner frame 17, and is configured by connecting the first mounting member 34 and the second mounting member 35.
  • the first mounting member 34 is composed of an upper surface portion 36 facing in the vertical direction and a right lateral surface portion 37 facing in the horizontal direction, and the right end portion of the upper surface portion 36 and the upper end portion of the right lateral surface portion 37 are continuous.
  • An insertion arrangement hole 37a is formed in the central portion of the right lateral surface portion 37.
  • the second mounting member 35 is composed of a lower surface portion 38 facing in the vertical direction and a left lateral surface portion 39 facing in the horizontal direction, and the left end portion of the lower surface portion 38 and the lower end portion of the left lateral surface portion 39 are continuous.
  • a mounting hole 39a is formed in the central portion of the left lateral surface portion 39.
  • the lower end of the right lateral surface portion 37 of the first mounting member 34 and the right end portion of the lower surface portion 38 of the second mounting member 35 are connected by screwing or the like, and the left end portion of the upper surface portion 36 of the first mounting member 34. And the upper end portion of the left lateral surface portion 39 of the second mounting member 35 are connected by screwing or the like.
  • the outer frame 16, the inner frame 17, and the holding frame 18 are formed by connecting two members to each other is shown, but the outer frame 16, the inner frame 17, and the holding frame 18 are one or more.
  • Each of the three or more members may be formed in a frame shape.
  • the lens unit 19 is arranged inside the holding frame 18, and is attached to the rear end of the lens barrel 40 with a plurality of lenses 41, 41, ... Arranged side by side inside the lens barrel 40 and the lens barrel 40. It has a lens imaging unit 42.
  • the lens barrel 40 is formed in a long tubular shape in the front-rear direction.
  • the image pickup unit 42 has an image pickup device (not shown) such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or a CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor).
  • an image pickup device such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or a CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor).
  • a cover member 43 is attached to the outer peripheral side of the lens 41 located on the frontmost side of the front surface of the lens barrel 40.
  • the cover member 43 is formed in an annular shape, and the front surface is formed in a spherical shape that is convex forward.
  • Drive motors 44 and 44 are arranged above and to the side of the lens unit 19, respectively (see FIGS. 4 and 5).
  • the drive motor 44 arranged above the lens unit 19 is provided as the first drive motor 44A
  • the drive motor 44 arranged on the side of the lens unit 19 is provided as the second drive motor 44B. ..
  • the first drive motor 44A and the second drive motor 44B are arranged in different directions but have the same configuration. In the following description, one drive motor 44 is referred to as the first drive motor 44A, depending on the case.
  • the other drive motor 44 is shown as the second drive motor 44B.
  • the drive motor 44 is, for example, a flat motor, and has a base yoke 45, a magnet 46, coils 47, 47, ..., An opposing yoke 48, a bearing holder 49, a bearing 50, and a support shaft 51 (FIG. 6). To FIG. 9). The following configuration of the drive motor 44 will be described with the orientation of the first drive motor 44A.
  • the base yoke 45 is formed in a substantially annular shape of a flat plate facing in the vertical direction.
  • the magnet 46 is formed in an annular shape, is attached to the upper surface of the base yoke 45, is positioned so as to face the winding portions 52, 52, ... Of the coils 47, 47, ..., And is arranged in the circumferential direction.
  • the poles and the poles 46a, 46a, ... Of the S pole are alternately magnetized.
  • the magnet 46 is magnetized to eight poles at equal intervals of 45 °, for example, and the boundaries of the magnetic poles 46a, 46a, ... Are formed as polar boundaries 46b, 46b, ....
  • the coil 47 has a winding portion 52 formed in an annular shape and a pair of connecting portions 53, 53 drawn from the winding portion 52 (see FIGS. 7 and 10).
  • the winding portion 52 includes an outer peripheral portion 52a formed in a gentle arc shape, an inner peripheral portion 52b located inside the outer peripheral portion 52a and formed in a gentle arc shape, and both ends and inner circumferences of the outer peripheral portion 52a. It is composed of linear thrust generating portions 52c and 52c connecting both ends of the portion 52b, respectively.
  • the connecting portions 53 and 53 are portions corresponding to both ends of the coil 47 and are portions drawn out from the winding portion 52.
  • the coils 47, 47, ... are attached to and arranged on the substrate 54 (see FIGS. 6 to 10).
  • the substrate 54 is, for example, a flexible printed wiring board, and has a coil arranging portion 55 formed in an annular shape and a conductive portion 56 derived from the coil arranging portion 55 and extending in a predetermined direction.
  • a circuit pattern (not shown) is formed on both sides of the substrate 54 in the thickness direction.
  • One surface of the coil arrangement portion 55 in the thickness direction is formed as the first arrangement surface 57, and the other surface in the thickness direction is formed as the second arrangement surface 58.
  • a flexible printed wiring board having a coil arranging portion 55 on which the coil 47 is arranged and a conductive portion 56 led out from the coil arranging portion 55 and extending in a predetermined direction is used as the substrate 54.
  • the conductive portion 56 is derived from the coil arranging portion 55, the conductive portion 56 can be positioned in a bendable state, the degree of freedom regarding the arrangement of the substrate 54 is high, and the image pickup apparatus. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design in 1.
  • Six winding portions 52, 52, ... Of the coils 47, 47, ... are arranged on the first arrangement surface 57 at intervals of 60 degrees, and are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. (See FIGS. 6 and 7). For example, two coils 47, 47, ... Are connected to each other to form a three-phase structure.
  • connection portions 53, 53 of the coil 47 are folded back through the outside of the outer peripheral surface 55a of the coil arrangement portion 55, and the tip portions 53a, 53a are formed as one end of the circuit pattern on the second arrangement surface 56. It is connected to the connection terminal portion 59 (see FIGS. 7, 10 and 11).
  • the connection terminal portions 59 and 59 are adjacent to each other with the tip portions 53a and 53a of the respective connection portions 53 and 53 drawn out from the two winding portions 52 and 52 located adjacent to each other. It is connected to the.
  • the tip end portion 53a of the connection portion 53 of the coil 47 is connected to the connection terminal portion 59 on the second arrangement surface 58, and the connection portion 53 is connected to the first arrangement surface 57 side of the coil arrangement portion 55. Since the tip portion 53a of the first portion 53a does not exist, the arrangement space for the winding portion 52 of the first arrangement surface 57 on the substrate 54 can be increased accordingly.
  • the first arrangement surface 57 Since it is possible to increase the arrangement space for the winding portion 52 of the first arrangement surface 57 in this way, the first arrangement surface 57 has six winding portions 52, 52 in the circumferential direction. , ... Are arranged side by side at equal intervals (see FIG. 7). Further, the distance H between the thrust generating portions 52c and 52c arranged in the adjacent winding portions 52 and 52 is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of turns of the winding portion 52, and the driving force generated when the winding portion 52 is energized is increased.
  • Magnetic detection elements 60, 60, 60 are arranged and arranged apart from each other in the circumferential direction on the second arrangement surface 58 of the substrate 54 (see FIGS. 6 and 11).
  • the magnetic detection elements 60, 60, 60 have a function of detecting the position of the magnet 46 relative to the coils 47, 47, ... In the rotation direction, and are positioned at intervals of, for example, 60 degrees.
  • the magnetic detection element 60 is arranged at a position corresponding to the connection portions 53, 53 of one coil 47.
  • the magnetic detection element 60 is located between the connecting portions 53 and 53 adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction, and the connection portion 53 and the magnetic detection element 60 are not arranged in a radial direction. Therefore, the magnetic detection element 60 It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the arrangement position with respect to the substrate 54.
  • An annular reinforcing sheet 61 for reinforcing the coil arranging portion 55 is attached to the second arranging surface 58 of the coil arranging portion 55.
  • Relief cutouts 61a, 61a, ... Are formed on the outer peripheral portion of the reinforcing sheet 61 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.
  • Relief holes 61b, 61b, 61b are formed in the reinforcing sheet 61 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.
  • connection portions 53, 53, ... Of the coil 47 are located in the escape cutouts 61a, 61a, ..., Respective holes 61b, respectively.
  • Magnetic detection elements 60, 60, and 60 are located at 61b and 61b, respectively. Therefore, the coil arranging portion 55 is reinforced by the reinforcing sheet 61, and interference between the reinforcing sheet 61 and the connecting portions 53, 53, ... And the magnetic detection elements 60, 60, 60 is avoided.
  • the facing yoke 48 is formed in a plate-shaped annular shape facing in the vertical direction, and is attached to the reinforcing sheet 61. Notches 48a, 48a, ... Are formed on the outer peripheral portion of the facing yoke 48 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Arrangement holes 48b, 48b, 48b are formed in the facing yoke 48 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.
  • the facing yoke 48 is attached to the reinforcing sheet 61 in a state where the notches 48a, 48a, ... And the arrangement holes 48b, 48b, 48b overlap the relief cutouts 61a, 61a, ... And the relief holes 61b, 61b, 61b, respectively. ing. Therefore, interference between the facing yoke 48 and the connecting portions 53, 53, ... And the magnetic detection elements 60, 60, 60 is avoided.
  • An auxiliary yoke 62 is attached to the facing yoke 48 from the opposite side of the reinforcing sheet 61.
  • the auxiliary yoke 62 is formed in an annular shape of a flat plate, and is attached to the facing yoke 48 in a state of covering the notches 48a, 48a, ... And the arrangement holes 48b, 48b, 48b.
  • a base yoke 45 to which the magnet 46 is attached and an opposing yoke 48 in which an arrangement hole 48b in which the magnetic detection element 60 is arranged are formed are provided, and the facing yoke 48 is attached to the arrangement hole 48.
  • An auxiliary yoke 62 is provided to cover the 48b.
  • the arrangement hole 48b is covered with the auxiliary yoke 62 to form a closed magnetic path, the sensitivity of the magnetic detection element 60 can be improved.
  • the bearing holder 49 projects outward from the middle portion in the vertical direction of the tubular portion 49a whose vertical direction is axial and the bottom surface portion 49b that closes the lower opening of the tubular portion 49a and the tubular portion 49a. It has a flange portion 49c (see FIGS. 6, 8 and 9).
  • the bearing holder 49 has a flange portion 49c attached to the inner peripheral portion on the upper surface of the base yoke 45 in a state where a part of the tubular portion 49a is inserted into the central portion of the base yoke 45.
  • a thrust receiver 63 is arranged on the inner surface of the bottom surface portion 49b of the bearing holder 49.
  • the bearing 50 is formed into a cylindrical shape by, for example, sintering.
  • the bearing 50 is inserted inside the tubular portion 49a of the bearing holder 49.
  • sintering is a method of molding without using a molding die, it is possible to produce a part having a predetermined shape even with a material having a high melting point or a material that easily reacts, and the bearing 50 is formed by sintering. As a result, it is possible to improve the choice of the material of the bearing 50.
  • the bearing 50 that rotatably supports the support shaft 51 is formed by sintering, a structure that supports the shaft without using a bearing (ball bearing) is configured. This makes it possible to reduce the diameter of the bearing 50 by that amount, and the drive motor 44 can be downsized.
  • the support shaft 51 is composed of a shaft portion 51a extending vertically, a flange-shaped attached portion 51b protruding from the upper end portion of the shaft portion 51a, and a head portion 51c located above the attached portion 51b.
  • the support shaft 51 is used as a rotation fulcrum in the drive motor 44, and the mounted portion 51b is the inner circumference of the lower surface of the facing yoke 48 with the head portion 51c inserted into the central portion of the opposing yoke 48 and the central portion of the auxiliary yoke 62. It is attached to the part.
  • the support shaft 51 has a shaft portion 51a inserted into the bearing 50 from above and rotatably supported by the bearing 50. At this time, the tip surface of the shaft portion 51a comes into contact with the thrust receiver 63, and the load in the axial direction of the support shaft 51 is received by the thrust receiver 63.
  • the first auxiliary shaft 64 is attached to the bottom surface 32 of the inner frame 17 in a state of being inserted into the attachment hole 32a (see FIG. 5).
  • the upper end of the first sub-shaft 64 is inserted into the mounting hole 32a, and the portion other than the upper end protrudes downward from the bottom surface 32.
  • the second auxiliary shaft 65 is attached to the left lateral surface portion 39 of the holding frame 18 in a state of being inserted into the mounting hole 39a.
  • the right end of the second auxiliary shaft 65 is inserted into the mounting hole 39a, and the portion other than the right end protrudes to the left from the left lateral surface portion 39.
  • the first bearing body 66 is attached to the first planar portion 26 of the outer frame 16 with the mounting holes 26a inserted, and the second bearing body 67 is attached to the left side surface portion 33 of the inner frame 17 with the mounting holes 33a inserted. It is installed in the state of being inserted in.
  • a holding frame 18 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the lens unit 19 by screwing or the like (see FIGS. 3 and 5).
  • both front and rear ends of the lens unit 19 are projected to the front and back of the holding frame 18, respectively.
  • the base yoke 45 of the second drive motor 44B is attached to the outer surface of the right lateral surface portion 37 of the holding frame 18 by screwing or the like, and the second drive motor 44B is arranged on the right side of the lens unit 19.
  • An inner frame 17 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the holding frame 18.
  • the second auxiliary shaft 65 attached to the left lateral surface portion 39 of the holding frame 18 is attached to the left side surface portion 33 of the inner frame 17. It is rotatably supported by the bearing body 67 of the above.
  • the auxiliary yoke 62 of the second drive motor 44B is attached to the inner surface of the right side surface portion 31 of the inner frame 17 by screwing or the like.
  • a part of the bearing holder 49 in the second drive motor 44B is inserted into the insertion arrangement hole 37a formed in the right lateral surface portion 37 of the holding frame 18, and a part of the support shaft 51 in the second drive motor 44B is an inner frame. It is inserted into the through hole 31a formed in the right side surface portion 31 of 17.
  • the base yoke 45 of the first drive motor 44A is attached to the upper surface of the top surface portion 30 of the inner frame 17 by screwing or the like, and the first drive motor 44A is arranged above the lens unit 19 and the holding frame 18.
  • the outer frame 16 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the inner frame 17.
  • the first auxiliary shaft 64 attached to the bottom surface portion 32 of the inner frame 17 is attached to the first planar portion 26 of the outer frame 16. It is rotatably supported by the first bearing body 66.
  • the auxiliary yoke 62 of the first drive motor 44A is attached to the lower surface of the first surface portion 22 of the outer frame 16 by screwing or the like.
  • a part of the bearing holder 49 in the first drive motor 44A is inserted into the insertion arrangement hole 30a formed in the top surface portion 30 of the inner frame 17, and a part of the support shaft 51 in the first drive motor 44A is the outer frame 16. It is inserted into the through hole 22a formed in the first surface portion 22 of the above.
  • the axis connecting the central axis of the support shaft 51 of the drive motor 44 and the central axis of the first sub-axis 64 is set as the first fulcrum axis 68, and the first fulcrum axis 68 is used.
  • the axis connecting the central axis of the support shaft 51 of the drive motor 44B and the central axis of the second sub-axis 65 is referred to as the second fulcrum axis 69 (see FIG. 5).
  • the base yoke 45 is attached to the inner frame 17 and the auxiliary yoke 62 is attached to the outer frame 16 in a state where the axial direction is up and down. Therefore, in the first drive motor 44A, when a current is supplied to the coil 47 and thrust is generated in the thrust generating portions 52c and 52c, a rotational force is generated in the magnet 46 with the support shaft 51 as the rotation fulcrum, and the outer frame 16 is generated. On the other hand, the inner frame 17 is rotated.
  • the base yoke 45 is attached to the holding frame 18 and the auxiliary yoke 62 is attached to the inner frame 17 in a state where the axial direction is in the left-right direction. Therefore, in the second drive motor 44B, when a current is supplied to the coil 47 and thrust is generated in the thrust generating portions 52c and 52c, a rotational force is generated in the magnet 46 with the support shaft 51 as the rotation fulcrum, and the inner frame 17 is generated. On the other hand, the holding frame 18 is rotated.
  • the magnet 46 is positioned so as to face the winding portions 52, 52, ... Of the coils 47, 47, ... (See FIG. 12). Therefore, when a current is supplied to the coil 47 of the first drive motor 44A and thrust is generated in the thrust generating portions 52c and 52c, the central axis of the support shaft 51 and the central axis of the first auxiliary shaft 64 are connected to the magnet 46. A rotational force is generated with the first fulcrum shaft 68 as the fulcrum.
  • the magnet 46 is positioned so as to face the winding portions 52, 52, ... Of the coils 47, 47, .... Therefore, when a current is supplied to the coil 47 of the second drive motor 44B and thrust is generated in the thrust generating portions 52c and 52c, the central axis of the support shaft 51 and the central axis of the second auxiliary shaft 65 are connected to the magnet 46. A rotational force is generated with the second fulcrum shaft 69 as the fulcrum.
  • the lens unit 19 is rotated in the yawing direction (first direction) by the driving force (thrust) of the first drive motor 44A with the first fulcrum shaft 68 as the fulcrum, and the second fulcrum shaft 69 is the fulcrum. As a result, it is rotated in the pitching direction (second direction) by the driving force (thrust) of the second driving motor 44B.
  • the rotation position of the magnet 46 is detected by the magnetic detection element 60 of the first drive motor 44A.
  • the rotation position of the magnet 46 is detected by detecting the change in the magnetic flux accompanying the rotation of the magnet 46 by the magnetic detection element 60, and the yawing direction of the lens unit 19 is based on the detection result of the rotation position of the magnet 46.
  • the rotation position is detected.
  • the thrust generating portions 52c, 52c, ... Are corrected for blurring according to the detection result of the rotation position of the magnet 46.
  • the current is supplied so that thrust is generated in the direction of the magnet.
  • the rotation of the lens unit 19 in the pitching direction is such that the thrust generating portions 52c, 52c, ... Of the second drive motor 44B generate a thrust in the direction for correcting the blurring.
  • This is done by supplying an electric current to 52, ...
  • the lens unit 19 rotates integrally with the holding frame 18 with respect to the outer frame 16 and the inner frame 17 with the second fulcrum shaft 69 as the fulcrum as the base yoke 45, the magnet 46, and the support shaft 51 rotate. It is moved (see FIG. 14).
  • the rotation position of the magnet 46 is detected by the magnetic detection element 60 of the second drive motor 44B.
  • the rotation position of the magnet 46 is detected by detecting the change in the magnetic flux accompanying the rotation of the magnet 46 by the magnetic detection element 60, and the rotation position of the magnet 46 is detected in the pitching direction of the lens unit 19 based on the detection result.
  • the rotation position is detected.
  • the thrust generating portions 52c, 52c, ... Are corrected for blurring according to the detection result of the rotation position of the magnet 46.
  • the current is supplied so that thrust is generated in the direction of the magnet.
  • the lens unit 19 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 17 with the second fulcrum shaft 69 as the fulcrum, and the lens unit 19 and the inner frame 17 with the first fulcrum shaft 68 as the fulcrum on the outer frame 16.
  • An example was shown in which the lenses were integrally supported so as to be rotatably supported.
  • the lens unit 19 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 17 with the first fulcrum shaft 68 as the fulcrum, and the second fulcrum shaft 69 is provided on the outer frame 16.
  • the lens unit 19 and the inner frame 17 may be integrally supported so as to be rotatable.
  • the coil 47 has a three-phase configuration, and three magnetic detection elements 60, 60, 60 are arranged side by side in the circumferential direction on the coil arrangement portion 55 on the substrate 54, and the magnetism It is possible to set different drive states in the blur correction device 15 by switching the energization state for each of the coils 47, 47 constituting each phase according to the detection state by the detection elements 60, 60, 60.
  • the magnet 44X according to the modification shown below is different from the magnet 44 because it differs from the magnet 44 only in that the number of coils and magnetic detection elements is different and the structure related to the bearing is different. Only the part will be described in detail, and the other parts will be given the same reference numerals as those given to the same parts in the magnet 44, and the description thereof will be omitted.
  • magnets 44X have different shapes with respect to the corresponding parts of the magnet 44, but the structure is different except that the number of coils and magnetic detection elements is different and the structure related to the bearing is different. Since it is the same as the magnet 44, the description of the difference in shape between the magnet 44X and the magnet 44 will be omitted.
  • the drive motor 44X is, for example, a flat motor, and has a base yoke 45, a magnet 46, coils 47X, 47X, ..., Opposing yoke 48, a bearing holder 49X, a bearing 50X, and a support shaft 51X.
  • the configuration of the drive motor 44X below will be described in the same direction as that of the first drive motor 44A.
  • the coil 47X has a winding portion 52X and a pair of connecting portions 53 and 53.
  • the winding portion 52X is formed in a shape longer in the circumferential direction with respect to the winding portion 52.
  • the number of coils 47X is smaller than that of the coils 47.
  • four coils 47X are provided at intervals of 90 ° and are arranged side by side at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.
  • the coils 47X, 47X, ... Are formed in, for example, one phase.
  • connection portions 53 and 53 of the coil 47X are folded back through the outside of the outer peripheral surface 55a of the coil arrangement portion 55, and the tip portions 53a and 53a are at one end of the circuit pattern on the second arrangement surface 56. It is connected to the connection terminal portions 59 and 59 formed in the portions, respectively.
  • the number of coils 47X arranged on the first arrangement surface 57 of the substrate 54 is smaller than that of the drive motor 44, and there are many arrangement spaces other than the coils 47X on the first arrangement surface 57. Therefore, even if the connection terminal portion 59 is formed on the first arrangement surface 57 and the tip end portion 53a of the connection portion 53 in the coil 47X is connected to the connection terminal portion 59 on the first arrangement surface 57. Good.
  • a magnetic detection element 60 is attached and arranged on the second arrangement surface 58 of the substrate 54.
  • the magnetic detection element 60 has a function of detecting the position of the magnet 46 relative to the coils 47X, 47X, ... In the rotation direction.
  • the bearing holder 49X is projected outward from the middle portion in the vertical direction of the top surface portion 49e and the tubular portion 49d that close the upper openings of the tubular portion 49d and the tubular portion 49d whose vertical direction is axial. It has a flange portion 49f.
  • the bearing holder 49X has a flange portion 49f attached to an inner peripheral portion on the lower surface of the facing yoke 48 in a state where a part of the tubular portion 49d is inserted into the central portion of the facing yoke 48.
  • the bearing 50X is, for example, a ball bearing having outer rings 50a, 50a, inner rings 50b, 50b, bearing balls 50c, 50c, ..., And a tubular portion of the bearing holder 49X with the outer rings 50a, 50a separated vertically. It is fixed to 49a, and the inner rings 50b and 50b are fixed to the support shaft 51X of the shaft member 70 in a state of being separated from each other in the vertical direction. Spacers 50d are arranged between the outer rings 50a and 50a and the inner rings 50b and 50b.
  • the support shaft 51X is provided as a part of the shaft member 70, for example, and is used as a rotation fulcrum in the drive motor 44X.
  • the shaft member 70 is projected outward from the cylindrical portion 71 whose vertical direction is axial and the upper end portion of the substantially flat shaft forming portion 72 and the cylindrical portion 71 that close the lower opening of the cylindrical portion 71. It has an overhanging portion 73 and a support shaft 51X protruding upward from the central portion of the shaft forming portion 72.
  • the overhanging portion 73 is the upper surface of the base yoke 45 with the cylindrical portion 71 inserted into the central portion of the base yoke 45 from above and the support shaft 51X inserted into the tubular portion 49a of the bearing holder 49X from below. It is attached to the inner circumference of.
  • the shaft member 70 is rotatably supported by the bearing holder 49X via the bearing 50X.
  • a current is supplied to the coil 47X and the magnetic detection element 60 from a power supply circuit (not shown) via the substrate 54.
  • FIG. 18 shows a block diagram of a video camera according to an embodiment of the imaging device of the present technology.
  • the image pickup device (video camera) 100 (corresponding to the image pickup device 1) includes a lens unit 101 (corresponding to the lens unit 19) responsible for the image pickup function and a camera signal that performs signal processing such as analog-digital conversion of the captured image signal. It has a processing unit 102 and an image processing unit 103 that performs recording / reproduction processing of an image signal.
  • the image pickup apparatus 100 writes an image signal to an image display unit 104 (corresponding to the display unit 13) of a liquid crystal panel or the like for displaying a captured image or the like and a memory 1000 (corresponding to a memory card 9 and an internal memory).
  • An input unit 107 consisting of an R / W (reader / writer) 105 for reading and reading, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 106 for controlling the entire image pickup device 100, and various switches for performing required operations by the user. It includes (corresponding to an operation switch 7, an operation button 8, an operation button 10, and an operation unit 17) and a lens drive control unit 108 that controls the drive of a lens arranged in the lens unit 101.
  • the lens unit 101 includes an optical system including a lens group 109 (corresponding to a lens 41) and an image sensor 110 (an image sensor provided in the image sensor 42) such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or a CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor). Equivalent to) etc.
  • a lens group 109 corresponding to a lens 41
  • an image sensor 110 an image sensor provided in the image sensor 42
  • CCD Charge Coupled Device
  • CMOS Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor
  • the camera signal processing unit 102 performs various signal processing such as conversion of the output signal from the image pickup element 110 into a digital signal, noise removal, image quality correction, and conversion into a luminance / color difference signal.
  • the image processing unit 103 performs compression coding / decompression decoding processing of an image signal based on a predetermined image data format, conversion processing of data specifications such as resolution, and the like.
  • the image display unit 104 has a function of displaying various data such as an operation state of the user's input unit 107 and a captured image.
  • the R / W 105 writes the image data encoded by the image processing unit 103 to the memory 1000 and reads the image data recorded in the memory 1000.
  • the CPU 106 functions as a control processing unit that controls each circuit block provided in the image pickup apparatus 100, and controls each circuit block based on an instruction input signal or the like from the input unit 107.
  • the input unit 107 is composed of, for example, a shutter release button for performing a shutter operation, a selection switch for selecting an operation mode, and the like, and outputs an instruction input signal according to the operation by the user to the CPU 106.
  • the lens drive control unit 108 controls a motor or the like (not shown) that drives each lens of the lens group 109 based on a control signal from the CPU 106.
  • the memory 1000 is, for example, a semiconductor memory (memory card) that can be attached to and detached from a slot connected to the R / W 105, or an internal memory that is arranged inside the image pickup apparatus 100.
  • a semiconductor memory memory card
  • the image signal shot by the lens unit 101 is output to the image display unit 104 via the camera signal processing unit 102 under the control of the CPU 106, and is displayed as a camera-through image. Further, when an instruction input signal for zooming is input from the input unit 107, the CPU 106 outputs a control signal to the lens drive control unit 108, and a predetermined lens group 109 is determined based on the control of the lens drive control unit 108. The lens is moved.
  • the captured image signal is output from the camera signal processing unit 102 to the image processing unit 103 for compression coding processing, and a predetermined image signal is processed. Converted to digital data in data format. The converted data is output to R / W 105 and written to memory 1000.
  • Focusing and zooming are performed by the lens drive control unit 108 moving a predetermined lens of the lens group 109 based on a control signal from the CPU 106.
  • the R / W 105 When reproducing the image data recorded in the memory 1000, the R / W 105 reads out the predetermined image data from the memory 1000 in response to the operation on the input unit 107, and the image processing unit 103 performs the decompression / decoding process. After that, the reproduced image signal is output to the image display unit 104 and the reproduced image is displayed.
  • imaging means conversion from photoelectric conversion processing for converting light captured by the imaging element 110 into an electric signal to digital signal for an output signal from the imaging element 110 by the camera signal processing unit 102. , Noise removal, image quality correction, conversion to brightness / color difference signals, etc., compression coding / decompression decoding processing of image signals based on a predetermined image data format by the image processing unit 103, conversion processing of data specifications such as resolution, etc. , Refers to a process including only a part or all of a series of processes up to the process of writing an image signal to the memory 1000 by the R / W 105.
  • imaging may refer only to the photoelectric conversion process for converting the light captured by the imaging element 110 into an electric signal, and from the photoelectric conversion process for converting the light captured by the imaging element 110 into an electric signal. It may also refer to processing such as conversion of the output signal from the image pickup element 110 by the camera signal processing unit 102 into a digital signal, noise removal, image quality correction, and conversion into a brightness / color difference signal, and is captured by the image pickup element 110.
  • the camera signal processing unit 102 converts the output signal from the image pickup element 110 into a digital signal, noise removal, image quality correction, conversion into a brightness / color difference signal, and the like.
  • the photographing apparatus 100 may be configured to include only a part or all of the image pickup element 110, the camera signal processing unit 102, the image processing unit 103, and the R / W 105 that perform the above processing. ..
  • both sides of the coil arrangement portion 55 on the substrate 54 in the thickness direction are the first arrangement surface 57 and the second arrangement, respectively.
  • the winding portions 52 of the plurality of coils 47 are arranged on the first arrangement surface 57
  • the magnetic detection element 60 is arranged on the second arrangement surface 58.
  • a plurality of winding portions 52 and magnetic detection elements 60 are arranged on the first arrangement surface 57 and the second arrangement surface 58, which are both sides in the thickness direction of the substrate 54, respectively, and magnetic detection is performed on the first arrangement surface 57.
  • Space for arranging the element 60 is not required. This makes it possible to increase the number of winding portions 52 and the number of windings of the winding portion 52 arranged on the first arrangement surface 57, so that the magnetic detection element 60 ensures an appropriate detection state before driving.
  • the driving force (thrust) of the motors 44 and 44X can be improved.
  • connection terminal portion 59 is formed on the substrate 54 to which both ends of the coil 47 are connected, and the tip end portion 53a of the connection portion 53 in the coil 47 is connected to the connection terminal portion 59 on the second arrangement surface 58.
  • the tip end portion 53a of the connection portion 53 does not exist on the first arrangement surface 57 side of the coil arrangement portion 55, it is possible to increase the arrangement space of the first arrangement surface 57 on the substrate 54 by that amount.
  • the thrust efficiency of the drive motors 44 and 44X can be improved by further increasing the number of winding portions 52 and further increasing the number of windings of the winding portion 52.
  • the connecting portion 53 of the coil 47 passes through the outside of the outer peripheral surface 55a of the coil arranging portion 55 and is folded back.
  • connection portion 53 is connected to the connecting terminal portion 59 through the outside of the outer peripheral surface 55a of the coil arranging portion 55, it is not necessary to form an insertion hole for inserting the connecting portion 53 in the substrate 54, and the substrate 54
  • the formation region of the circuit pattern can be increased, and the connection portion 53 can be connected to the connection terminal portion 59 by a simple structure.
  • the phase state of the coil 47 is 1 in the drive motor 44 and the drive motor 44X. It is not limited to phase or three phases.
  • the technology according to the present disclosure can be applied to various products.
  • the technology according to the present disclosure includes any type of movement such as automobiles, electric vehicles, hybrid electric vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles, personal mobility, airplanes, drones, ships, robots, construction machines, agricultural machines (tractors), and the like. It may be realized as a device mounted on the body.
  • the drive motors 44 and 44X may be used as, for example, a drive unit such as an openable mirror provided in a vehicle such as an automobile.
  • FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration example of a vehicle control system 7000, which is an example of a mobile control system to which the technique according to the present disclosure can be applied.
  • the vehicle control system 7000 includes a plurality of electronic control units connected via the communication network 7010.
  • the vehicle control system 7000 includes a drive system control unit 7100, a body system control unit 7200, a battery control unit 7300, an external information detection unit 7400, an in-vehicle information detection unit 7500, and an integrated control unit 7600. ..
  • the communication network 7010 connecting these plurality of control units conforms to any standard such as CAN (Controller Area Network), LIN (Local Interconnect Network), LAN (Local Area Network) or FlexRay (registered trademark). It may be an in-vehicle communication network.
  • CAN Controller Area Network
  • LIN Local Interconnect Network
  • LAN Local Area Network
  • FlexRay registered trademark
  • Each control unit includes a microcomputer that performs arithmetic processing according to various programs, a storage unit that stores a program executed by the microcomputer or parameters used for various arithmetics, and a drive circuit that drives various control target devices. To be equipped.
  • Each control unit is provided with a network I / F for communicating with other control units via the communication network 7010, and is connected to devices or sensors inside or outside the vehicle by wired communication or wireless communication.
  • a communication I / F for performing communication is provided. In FIG.
  • control unit 7600 the microcomputer 7610, the general-purpose communication I / F 7620, the dedicated communication I / F 7630, the positioning unit 7640, the beacon receiving unit 7650, the in-vehicle device I / F 7660, the audio image output unit 7670, The vehicle-mounted network I / F 7680 and the storage unit 7690 are shown.
  • Other control units also include a microcomputer, a communication I / F, a storage unit, and the like.
  • the drive system control unit 7100 controls the operation of the device related to the drive system of the vehicle according to various programs.
  • the drive system control unit 7100 provides a driving force generator for generating the driving force of the vehicle such as an internal combustion engine or a driving motor, a driving force transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force to the wheels, and a steering angle of the vehicle. It functions as a control device such as a steering mechanism for adjusting and a braking device for generating a braking force of a vehicle.
  • the drive system control unit 7100 may have a function as a control device such as ABS (Antilock Brake System) or ESC (Electronic Stability Control).
  • the vehicle condition detection unit 7110 is connected to the drive system control unit 7100.
  • the vehicle state detection unit 7110 may include, for example, a gyro sensor that detects the angular velocity of the rotational movement of the vehicle body, an acceleration sensor that detects the acceleration of the vehicle, an accelerator pedal operation amount, a brake pedal operation amount, or steering wheel steering. It includes at least one of sensors for detecting an angle, engine speed, wheel speed, and the like.
  • the drive system control unit 7100 performs arithmetic processing using a signal input from the vehicle state detection unit 7110 to control an internal combustion engine, a drive motor, an electric power steering device, a brake device, and the like.
  • the body system control unit 7200 controls the operation of various devices mounted on the vehicle body according to various programs.
  • the body system control unit 7200 functions as a keyless entry system, a smart key system, a power window device, or a control device for various lamps such as headlamps, back lamps, brake lamps, blinkers or fog lamps.
  • the body system control unit 7200 may be input with radio waves transmitted from a portable device that substitutes for the key or signals of various switches.
  • the body system control unit 7200 receives inputs of these radio waves or signals and controls a vehicle door lock device, a power window device, a lamp, and the like.
  • the battery control unit 7300 controls the secondary battery 7310, which is the power supply source of the drive motor, according to various programs. For example, information such as the battery temperature, the battery output voltage, or the remaining capacity of the battery is input to the battery control unit 7300 from the battery device including the secondary battery 7310. The battery control unit 7300 performs arithmetic processing using these signals, and controls the temperature control of the secondary battery 7310 or the cooling device provided in the battery device.
  • the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 detects information outside the vehicle equipped with the vehicle control system 7000.
  • the image pickup unit 7410 and the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7420 is connected to the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400.
  • the imaging unit 7410 includes at least one of a ToF (Time Of Flight) camera, a stereo camera, a monocular camera, an infrared camera, and other cameras.
  • the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7420 is used to detect, for example, the current weather or an environmental sensor for detecting the weather, or other vehicles, obstacles, pedestrians, etc. around the vehicle equipped with the vehicle control system 7000. At least one of the ambient information detection sensors is included.
  • the environmental sensor may be, for example, at least one of a raindrop sensor that detects rainy weather, a fog sensor that detects fog, a sunshine sensor that detects the degree of sunshine, and a snow sensor that detects snowfall.
  • the ambient information detection sensor may be at least one of an ultrasonic sensor, a radar device, and a LIDAR (Light Detection and Ranging, Laser Imaging Detection and Ranging) device.
  • the imaging unit 7410 and the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7420 may be provided as independent sensors or devices, or may be provided as a device in which a plurality of sensors or devices are integrated.
  • FIG. 20 shows an example of the installation positions of the imaging unit 7410 and the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7420.
  • the imaging units 7910, 7912, 7914, 7916, 7918 are provided, for example, at at least one of the front nose, side mirrors, rear bumpers, back door, and upper part of the windshield of the vehicle interior of the vehicle 7900.
  • the image pickup unit 7910 provided on the front nose and the image pickup section 7918 provided on the upper part of the windshield in the vehicle interior mainly acquire an image in front of the vehicle 7900.
  • the imaging units 7912 and 7914 provided in the side mirrors mainly acquire images of the side of the vehicle 7900.
  • the image pickup unit 7916 provided on the rear bumper or the back door mainly acquires an image of the rear of the vehicle 7900.
  • the imaging unit 7918 provided on the upper part of the windshield in the vehicle interior is mainly used for detecting a preceding vehicle, a pedestrian, an obstacle, a traffic light, a traffic sign, a lane, or the like.
  • FIG. 20 shows an example of the photographing range of each of the imaging units 7910, 7912, 7914, and 7916.
  • the imaging range a indicates the imaging range of the imaging unit 7910 provided on the front nose
  • the imaging ranges b and c indicate the imaging ranges of the imaging units 7912 and 7914 provided on the side mirrors, respectively
  • the imaging range d indicates the imaging range d.
  • the imaging range of the imaging unit 7916 provided on the rear bumper or the back door is shown. For example, by superimposing the image data captured by the imaging units 7910, 7912, 7914, and 7916, a bird's-eye view image of the vehicle 7900 as viewed from above can be obtained.
  • the vehicle exterior information detection units 7920, 7922, 7924, 7926, 7928, 7930 provided on the front, rear, side, corners and the upper part of the windshield in the vehicle interior of the vehicle 7900 may be, for example, an ultrasonic sensor or a radar device.
  • the vehicle exterior information detection units 7920, 7926, 7930 provided on the front nose, rear bumper, back door, and upper part of the windshield in the vehicle interior of the vehicle 7900 may be, for example, a lidar device.
  • These out-of-vehicle information detection units 7920 to 7930 are mainly used for detecting a preceding vehicle, a pedestrian, an obstacle, or the like.
  • the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 causes the image pickup unit 7410 to capture an image of the vehicle exterior and receives the captured image data. Further, the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 receives detection information from the connected vehicle exterior information detection unit 7420. When the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7420 is an ultrasonic sensor, a radar device, or a LIDAR device, the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 transmits ultrasonic waves, electromagnetic waves, or the like, and receives the received reflected wave information.
  • the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 may perform object detection processing or distance detection processing such as a person, a vehicle, an obstacle, a sign, or a character on a road surface based on the received information.
  • the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 may perform an environment recognition process for recognizing rainfall, fog, road surface conditions, etc., based on the received information.
  • the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 may calculate the distance to an object outside the vehicle based on the received information.
  • the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 may perform image recognition processing or distance detection processing for recognizing a person, a vehicle, an obstacle, a sign, a character on the road surface, or the like based on the received image data.
  • the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 performs processing such as distortion correction or alignment on the received image data, and synthesizes the image data captured by different imaging units 7410 to generate a bird's-eye view image or a panoramic image. May be good.
  • the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 may perform the viewpoint conversion process using the image data captured by different imaging units 7410.
  • the in-vehicle information detection unit 7500 detects the in-vehicle information.
  • a driver state detection unit 7510 that detects the driver's state is connected to the in-vehicle information detection unit 7500.
  • the driver state detection unit 7510 may include a camera that captures the driver, a biosensor that detects the driver's biological information, a microphone that collects sound in the vehicle interior, and the like.
  • the biosensor is provided on, for example, the seat surface or the steering wheel, and detects the biometric information of the passenger sitting on the seat or the driver holding the steering wheel.
  • the in-vehicle information detection unit 7500 may calculate the degree of fatigue or concentration of the driver based on the detection information input from the driver state detection unit 7510, and may determine whether the driver is dozing or not. You may.
  • the in-vehicle information detection unit 7500 may perform processing such as noise canceling processing on the collected audio signal.
  • the integrated control unit 7600 controls the overall operation in the vehicle control system 7000 according to various programs.
  • An input unit 7800 is connected to the integrated control unit 7600.
  • the input unit 7800 is realized by a device such as a touch panel, a button, a microphone, a switch or a lever, which can be input-operated by a passenger. Data obtained by recognizing the voice input by the microphone may be input to the integrated control unit 7600.
  • the input unit 7800 may be, for example, a remote control device using infrared rays or other radio waves, or an externally connected device such as a mobile phone or a PDA (Personal Digital Assistant) that supports the operation of the vehicle control system 7000. You may.
  • the input unit 7800 may be, for example, a camera, in which case the passenger can input information by gesture. Alternatively, data obtained by detecting the movement of the wearable device worn by the passenger may be input. Further, the input unit 7800 may include, for example, an input control circuit that generates an input signal based on the information input by the passenger or the like using the input unit 7800 and outputs the input signal to the integrated control unit 7600. By operating the input unit 7800, the passenger or the like inputs various data to the vehicle control system 7000 and instructs the processing operation.
  • the storage unit 7690 may include a ROM (Read Only Memory) for storing various programs executed by the microcomputer, and a RAM (Random Access Memory) for storing various parameters, calculation results, sensor values, and the like. Further, the storage unit 7690 may be realized by a magnetic storage device such as an H drive motor (Hard Disc Drive), a semiconductor storage device, an optical storage device, an optical magnetic storage device, or the like.
  • ROM Read Only Memory
  • RAM Random Access Memory
  • the general-purpose communication I / F 7620 is a general-purpose communication I / F that mediates communication with various devices existing in the external environment 7750.
  • General-purpose communication I / F7620 is a cellular communication protocol such as GSM (registered trademark) (Global System of Mobile communications), WiMAX (registered trademark), LTE (registered trademark) (Long Term Evolution) or LTE-A (LTE-Advanced).
  • GSM Global System of Mobile communications
  • WiMAX registered trademark
  • LTE registered trademark
  • LTE-A Long Term Evolution-Advanced
  • Bluetooth® may be implemented.
  • the general-purpose communication I / F7620 connects to a device (for example, an application server or a control server) existing on an external network (for example, the Internet, a cloud network, or a business-specific network) via a base station or an access point, for example. You may. Further, the general-purpose communication I / F7620 uses, for example, P2P (Peer To Peer) technology, and is a terminal existing in the vicinity of the vehicle (for example, a terminal of a driver, a pedestrian or a store, or an MTC (Machine Type Communication) terminal). You may connect with.
  • P2P Peer To Peer
  • MTC Machine Type Communication
  • the dedicated communication I / F 7630 is a communication I / F that supports a communication protocol formulated for use in a vehicle.
  • the dedicated communication I / F7630 uses a standard protocol such as WAVE (Wireless Access in Vehicle Environment), DSRC (Dedicated Short Range Communications), or cellular communication protocol, which is a combination of IEEE802.11p in the lower layer and IEEE1609 in the upper layer. May be implemented.
  • the dedicated communication I / F7630 typically includes vehicle-to-vehicle (Vehicle to Vehicle) communication, road-to-vehicle (Vehicle to Infrastructure) communication, vehicle-to-home (Vehicle to Home) communication, and pedestrian-to-pedestrian (Vehicle to Pedertian) communication. ) Carry out V2X communication, a concept that includes one or more of the communications.
  • the positioning unit 7640 receives signals from each GN (Global Navigation Satellite System) satellite (for example, GPS signals from a GPS (Global Positioning System) satellite), executes positioning, and executes positioning, and the latitude and longitude of the vehicle. And generate location information including altitude.
  • the positioning unit 7640 may specify the current position by exchanging signals with the wireless access point, or may acquire position information from a terminal such as a mobile phone, PHS, or smartphone having a positioning function.
  • the beacon receiving unit 7650 receives radio waves or electromagnetic waves transmitted from a radio station or the like installed on the road, and acquires information such as the current position, traffic jam, road closure, or required time.
  • the function of the beacon receiving unit 7650 may be included in the above-mentioned dedicated communication I / F 7630.
  • the in-vehicle device I / F 7660 is a communication interface that mediates the connection between the microcomputer 7610 and various in-vehicle devices 7760 existing in the vehicle.
  • the in-vehicle device I / F7660 may establish a wireless connection using a wireless communication protocol such as wireless LAN, Bluetooth (registered trademark), NFC (Near Field Communication) or WUSB (Wireless USB).
  • a wireless communication protocol such as wireless LAN, Bluetooth (registered trademark), NFC (Near Field Communication) or WUSB (Wireless USB).
  • the in-vehicle device I / F7660 is connected via a connection terminal (and a cable if necessary) (not shown), USB (Universal Serial Bus), HDMI (registered trademark) (High-Definition Multimedia Interface, or MHL (Mobile High)).
  • a wired connection such as -definition Link
  • MHL Mobile High-definition Link
  • the in-vehicle device 7760 includes, for example, at least one of a mobile device or a wearable device owned by a passenger, or an information device carried in or attached to a vehicle. Further, the in-vehicle device 7760 may include a navigation device that searches for a route to an arbitrary destination.
  • the in-vehicle device I / F 7660 is a control signal to and from these in-vehicle devices 7760. Or exchange the data signal.
  • the in-vehicle network I / F7680 is an interface that mediates communication between the microcomputer 7610 and the communication network 7010.
  • the vehicle-mounted network I / F7680 transmits / receives signals and the like according to a predetermined protocol supported by the communication network 7010.
  • the microcomputer 7610 of the integrated control unit 7600 is via at least one of general-purpose communication I / F7620, dedicated communication I / F7630, positioning unit 7640, beacon receiving unit 7650, in-vehicle device I / F7660, and in-vehicle network I / F7680.
  • the vehicle control system 7000 is controlled according to various programs based on the information acquired. For example, the microcomputer 7610 calculates the control target value of the driving force generator, the steering mechanism, or the braking device based on the acquired information inside and outside the vehicle, and outputs a control command to the drive system control unit 7100. May be good.
  • the microcomputer 7610 realizes ADAS (Advanced Driver Assistance System) functions including vehicle collision avoidance or impact mitigation, follow-up driving based on inter-vehicle distance, vehicle speed maintenance driving, vehicle collision warning, vehicle lane deviation warning, and the like. Cooperative control may be performed for the purpose of. Further, the microcomputer 7610 automatically travels autonomously without relying on the driver's operation by controlling the driving force generator, the steering mechanism, the braking device, etc. based on the acquired information on the surroundings of the vehicle. Coordinated control for the purpose of driving or the like may be performed.
  • ADAS Advanced Driver Assistance System
  • the microcomputer 7610 has information acquired via at least one of general-purpose communication I / F7620, dedicated communication I / F7630, positioning unit 7640, beacon receiving unit 7650, in-vehicle device I / F7660, and in-vehicle network I / F7680. Based on the above, three-dimensional distance information between the vehicle and an object such as a surrounding structure or a person may be generated, and local map information including the peripheral information of the current position of the vehicle may be created. Further, the microcomputer 7610 may predict the danger of a vehicle collision, a pedestrian or the like approaching or entering a closed road based on the acquired information, and generate a warning signal.
  • the warning signal may be, for example, a signal for generating a warning sound or turning on a warning lamp.
  • the audio / image output unit 7670 transmits an output signal of at least one of audio and an image to an output device capable of visually or audibly notifying the passenger of the vehicle or the outside of the vehicle.
  • an audio speaker 7710, a display unit 7720, and an instrument panel 7730 are exemplified as output devices.
  • the display unit 7720 may include, for example, at least one of an onboard display and a head-up display.
  • the display unit 7720 may have an AR (Augmented Reality) display function.
  • the output device may be other devices such as headphones, wearable devices such as eyeglass-type displays worn by passengers, projectors or lamps other than these devices.
  • the display device displays the results obtained by various processes performed by the microcomputer 7610 or the information received from other control units in various formats such as texts, images, tables, and graphs. Display visually.
  • the audio output device converts an audio signal composed of reproduced audio data or acoustic data into an analog signal and outputs the audio signal audibly.
  • At least two control units connected via the communication network 7010 may be integrated as one control unit.
  • each control unit may be composed of a plurality of control units.
  • the vehicle control system 7000 may include another control unit (not shown).
  • the other control unit may have a part or all of the functions carried out by any of the control units. That is, as long as information is transmitted and received via the communication network 7010, predetermined arithmetic processing may be performed by any control unit.
  • a sensor or device connected to any control unit may be connected to another control unit, and a plurality of control units may send and receive detection information to and from each other via the communication network 7010. .
  • a computer program for realizing each function of the information processing apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment described with reference to FIG. Z can be implemented in any control unit or the like. It is also possible to provide a computer-readable recording medium in which such a computer program is stored.
  • the recording medium is, for example, a magnetic disk, an optical disk, a magneto-optical disk, a flash memory, or the like. Further, the above computer program may be distributed via, for example, a network without using a recording medium.
  • ⁇ Application example 2> The technology according to the present disclosure can be applied to various products.
  • the techniques according to the present disclosure may be applied to operating room systems.
  • the drive motors 44, 44X may be used, for example, as a drive unit for operating each instrument in the operating room system.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically showing the overall configuration of the operating room system 5100 to which the technique according to the present disclosure can be applied.
  • the operating room system 5100 is configured by connecting a group of devices installed in the operating room in a coordinated manner via an audiovisual controller (AV Controller) 5107 and an operating room control device 5109.
  • AV Controller audiovisual controller
  • FIG. 21 various devices can be installed in the operating room.
  • various device groups 5101 for endoscopic surgery a ceiling camera 5187 provided on the ceiling of the operating room to capture the operator's hand, and an operating room provided on the ceiling of the operating room.
  • An operating room camera 5189 that captures the entire state, a plurality of display devices 5103A to 5103D, a recorder 5105, a patient bed 5183, and an illumination 5191 are illustrated.
  • the device group 5101 belongs to the endoscopic surgery system 5113 described later, and includes an endoscope, a display device that displays an image captured by the endoscope, and the like.
  • Each device belonging to the endoscopic surgery system 5113 is also referred to as a medical device.
  • the display devices 5103A to 5103D, the recorder 5105, the patient bed 5183, and the lighting 5191 are devices provided in the operating room, for example, separately from the endoscopic surgery system 5113.
  • Each of these devices that does not belong to the endoscopic surgery system 5113 is also referred to as a non-medical device.
  • the audiovisual controller 5107 and / or the operating room controller 5109 controls the operations of these medical devices and non-medical devices in cooperation with each other.
  • the audiovisual controller 5107 comprehensively controls processing related to image display in medical devices and non-medical devices.
  • the device group 5101, the sealing camera 5187, and the operating room camera 5189 have a function of transmitting information to be displayed during the operation (hereinafter, also referred to as display information).
  • It can be a device (hereinafter, also referred to as a source device).
  • the display devices 5103A to 5103D may be devices for outputting display information (hereinafter, also referred to as output destination devices).
  • the recorder 5105 may be a device corresponding to both the source device and the output destination device.
  • the audiovisual controller 5107 controls the operation of the source device and the output destination device, acquires display information from the source device, and transmits the display information to the output destination device for display or recording.
  • the displayed information includes various images captured during the operation, various information related to the operation (for example, physical information of the patient, past test results, information on the surgical procedure, etc.).
  • the audiovisual controller 5107 can be transmitted from the device group 5101 as display information about an image of the surgical site in the body cavity of the patient captured by the endoscope.
  • the sealing camera 5187 may transmit information about the image at the operator's hand captured by the sealing camera 5187 as display information.
  • the operating room camera 5189 may transmit as display information information about an image showing the state of the entire operating room captured by the operating room camera 5189.
  • the audiovisual controller 5107 also acquires information about an image captured by the other device from the other device as display information. You may.
  • the recorder 5105 records information about these images captured in the past by the audiovisual controller 5107.
  • the audiovisual controller 5107 can acquire information about the previously captured image from the recorder 5105 as display information.
  • various information about the operation may be recorded in advance in the recorder 5105.
  • the audiovisual controller 5107 causes at least one of the display devices 5103A to 5103D, which is the output destination device, to display the acquired display information (that is, an image taken during the operation and various information related to the operation).
  • the display device 5103A is a display device suspended from the ceiling of the operating room
  • the display device 5103B is a display device installed on the wall surface of the operating room
  • the display device 5103C is in the operating room. It is a display device installed on a desk
  • the display device 5103D is a mobile device having a display function (for example, a tablet PC (Personal Computer)).
  • the operating room system 5100 may include a device outside the operating room.
  • the device outside the operating room may be, for example, a server connected to a network constructed inside or outside the hospital, a PC used by medical staff, a projector installed in a conference room of the hospital, or the like.
  • the audiovisual controller 5107 can also display display information on a display device of another hospital via a video conferencing system or the like for telemedicine.
  • the operating room control device 5109 comprehensively controls processing other than processing related to image display in non-medical equipment.
  • the operating room control device 5109 controls the drive of the patient bed 5183, the sealing camera 5187, the operating room camera 5189, and the lighting 5191.
  • the operating room system 5100 is provided with a centralized operation panel 5111, and the user gives an instruction regarding image display to the audiovisual controller 5107 or gives an instruction to the operating room control device 5109 via the centralized operation panel 5111. On the other hand, instructions on the operation of non-medical devices can be given.
  • the centralized operation panel 5111 is configured by providing a touch panel on the display surface of the display device.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a display example of an operation screen on the centralized operation panel 5111.
  • FIG. 22 shows, as an example, an operation screen corresponding to a case where the operating room system 5100 is provided with two display devices as output destination devices.
  • the operation screen 5193 is provided with a source selection area 5195, a preview area 5197, and a control area 5201.
  • the source device provided in the operating room system 5100 and the thumbnail screen showing the display information possessed by the source device are linked and displayed.
  • the user can select the display information to be displayed on the display device from any of the source devices displayed in the source selection area 5195.
  • a preview of the screen displayed on the two display devices which are the output destination devices, is displayed.
  • four images are displayed in PinP on one display device.
  • the four images correspond to the display information transmitted from the source device selected in the source selection area 5195.
  • one is displayed relatively large as the main image and the remaining three are displayed relatively small as the sub-image.
  • the user can switch the main image and the sub image by appropriately selecting the area in which the four images are displayed.
  • a status display area 5199 is provided below the area where the four images are displayed, and the status related to the surgery (for example, the elapsed time of the surgery, the physical information of the patient, etc.) is appropriately displayed in the area. obtain.
  • the control area 5201 includes a source operation area 5203 in which GUI (Graphical User Interface) components for operating the source device are displayed, and GUI components for operating the output destination device. Is provided with an output destination operation area 5205 and.
  • GUI Graphic User Interface
  • the source operation area 5203 is provided with GUI components for performing various operations (pan, tilt, zoom) on the camera in the source device having an imaging function. The user can operate the operation of the camera in the source device by appropriately selecting these GUI components.
  • the source device selected in the source selection area 5195 is a recorder (that is, in the preview area 5197, an image recorded in the past is displayed on the recorder.
  • the source operation area 5203 may be provided with a GUI component for performing operations such as playing, stopping, rewinding, and fast-forwarding the image.
  • GUI parts for performing various operations for the display on the display device which is the output destination device are provided. It is provided. The user can operate the display on the display device by appropriately selecting these GUI components.
  • the operation screen displayed on the centralized operation panel 5111 is not limited to the illustrated example, and the user can use the audiovisual controller 5107 and the operating room control device 5109 provided in the operating room system 5100 via the centralized operation panel 5111. Operational inputs to each device that can be controlled may be possible.
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of an operation in which the operating room system described above is applied.
  • the ceiling camera 5187 and the operating room camera 5189 are provided on the ceiling of the operating room, and can photograph the hands of the surgeon (doctor) 5181 who treats the affected part of the patient 5185 on the patient bed 5183 and the entire operating room. Is.
  • the sealing camera 5187 and the operating field camera 5189 may be provided with a magnification adjusting function, a focal length adjusting function, a shooting direction adjusting function, and the like.
  • the illumination 5191 is provided on the ceiling of the operating room and illuminates at least the hands of the surgeon 5181.
  • the illumination 5191 may be capable of appropriately adjusting the amount of irradiation light, the wavelength (color) of the irradiation light, the irradiation direction of the light, and the like.
  • the endoscopic surgery system 5113, patient bed 5183, sealing camera 5187, operating room camera 5189 and lighting 5191 are via an audiovisual controller 5107 and an operating room control device 5109 (not shown in FIG. 23), as shown in FIG. Are connected so that they can cooperate with each other.
  • a centralized operation panel 5111 is provided in the operating room, and as described above, the user can appropriately operate these devices existing in the operating room through the centralized operation panel 5111.
  • the endoscopic surgery system 5113 includes an endoscope 5115, other surgical tools 5131, a support arm device 5141 that supports the endoscope 5115, and various devices for endoscopic surgery. It is composed of a cart 5151 on which the
  • troccas 5139a to 5139d are punctured into the abdominal wall.
  • the lens barrel 5117 of the endoscope 5115 and other surgical tools 5131 are inserted into the body cavity of the patient 5185 from the troccers 5139a to 5139d.
  • a pneumoperitoneum tube 5133, an energy treatment tool 5135, and forceps 5137 are inserted into the body cavity of patient 5185.
  • the energy treatment tool 5135 is a treatment tool that cuts and peels tissue, seals a blood vessel, or the like by using a high-frequency current or ultrasonic vibration.
  • the surgical tool 5131 shown is only an example, and as the surgical tool 5131, various surgical tools generally used in endoscopic surgery such as a sword and a retractor may be used.
  • the image of the surgical site in the body cavity of the patient 5185 taken by the endoscope 5115 is displayed on the display device 5155. While viewing the image of the surgical site displayed on the display device 5155 in real time, the surgeon 5181 uses the energy treatment tool 5135 and forceps 5137 to perform a procedure such as excising the affected area. Although not shown, the pneumoperitoneum tube 5133, the energy treatment tool 5135, and the forceps 5137 are supported by the surgeon 5181 or an assistant during the operation.
  • the support arm device 5141 includes an arm portion 5145 extending from the base portion 5143.
  • the arm portion 5145 is composed of joint portions 5147a, 5147b, 5147c, and links 5149a, 5149b, and is driven by control from the arm control device 5159.
  • the endoscope 5115 is supported by the arm portion 5145, and its position and posture are controlled. As a result, the stable position of the endoscope 5115 can be fixed.
  • the endoscope 5115 is composed of a lens barrel 5117 in which a region having a predetermined length from the tip is inserted into the body cavity of the patient 5185, and a camera head 5119 connected to the base end of the lens barrel 5117.
  • the endoscope 5115 configured as a so-called rigid mirror having a rigid barrel 5117 is illustrated, but the endoscope 5115 is configured as a so-called flexible mirror having a flexible barrel 5117. May be good.
  • the tip of the lens barrel 5117 is provided with an opening in which the objective lens is fitted.
  • a light source device 5157 is connected to the endoscope 5115, and the light generated by the light source device 5157 is guided to the tip of the lens barrel by a light guide extending inside the lens barrel 5117, and is an objective. It is irradiated toward the observation target in the body cavity of the patient 5185 through the lens.
  • the endoscope 5115 may be a direct endoscope, a perspective mirror, or a side endoscope.
  • An optical system and an image sensor are provided inside the camera head 5119, and the reflected light (observation light) from the observation target is focused on the image sensor by the optical system.
  • the observation light is photoelectrically converted by the image sensor, and an electric signal corresponding to the observation light, that is, an image signal corresponding to the observation image is generated.
  • the image signal is transmitted as RAW data to the camera control unit (CCU: Camera Control Unit) 5153.
  • the camera head 5119 is equipped with a function of adjusting the magnification and the focal length by appropriately driving the optical system.
  • the camera head 5119 may be provided with a plurality of image pickup elements in order to support stereoscopic viewing (3D display) and the like.
  • a plurality of relay optical systems are provided inside the lens barrel 5117 in order to guide the observation light to each of the plurality of image pickup elements.
  • the CCU 5153 is composed of a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), and the like, and comprehensively controls the operations of the endoscope 5115 and the display device 5155. Specifically, the CCU 5153 performs various image processing for displaying an image based on the image signal, such as development processing (demosaic processing), on the image signal received from the camera head 5119. The CCU 5153 provides the display device 5155 with the image signal subjected to the image processing. Further, the audiovisual controller 5107 shown in FIG. 21 is connected to the CCU 5153. CCU5153 also provides the image processed image signal to the audiovisual controller 5107.
  • the CCU 5153 transmits a control signal to the camera head 5119 and controls the driving thereof.
  • the control signal may include information about imaging conditions such as magnification and focal length.
  • the information regarding the imaging condition may be input via the input device 5161 or may be input via the centralized operation panel 5111 described above.
  • the display device 5155 displays an image based on the image signal processed by the CCU 5153 under the control of the CCU 5153.
  • the endoscope 5115 is compatible with high-resolution shooting such as 4K (3840 horizontal pixels x 2160 vertical pixels) or 8K (7680 horizontal pixels x 4320 vertical pixels), and / or 3D display.
  • the display device 5155 a device capable of displaying a high resolution and / or a device capable of displaying in 3D can be used corresponding to each of the above.
  • a display device 5155 having a size of 55 inches or more is used for high-resolution shooting such as 4K or 8K, a further immersive feeling can be obtained.
  • a plurality of display devices 5155 having different resolutions and sizes may be provided depending on the application.
  • the light source device 5157 is composed of, for example, a light source such as an LED (light LED diode), and supplies the irradiation light for photographing the surgical site to the endoscope 5115.
  • a light source such as an LED (light LED diode)
  • the arm control device 5159 is composed of a processor such as a CPU, and operates according to a predetermined program to control the drive of the arm portion 5145 of the support arm device 5141 according to a predetermined control method.
  • the input device 5161 is an input interface for the endoscopic surgery system 5113.
  • the user can input various information and input instructions to the endoscopic surgery system 5113 via the input device 5161.
  • the user inputs various information related to the surgery, such as physical information of the patient and information about the surgical procedure, via the input device 5161.
  • the user gives an instruction to drive the arm portion 5145 via the input device 5161 and an instruction to change the imaging conditions (type of irradiation light, magnification, focal length, etc.) by the endoscope 5115.
  • Input an instruction to drive the energy treatment tool 5135, and the like.
  • the type of the input device 5161 is not limited, and the input device 5161 may be various known input devices.
  • the input device 5161 for example, a mouse, a keyboard, a touch panel, a switch, a foot switch 5171 and / or a lever and the like can be applied.
  • the touch panel may be provided on the display surface of the display device 5155.
  • the input device 5161 is a device worn by the user, such as a glasses-type wearable device or an HMD (Head Mounted Display), and various inputs are made according to the user's gesture and line of sight detected by these devices. Is done. Further, the input device 5161 includes a camera capable of detecting the movement of the user, and various inputs are performed according to the gesture and the line of sight of the user detected from the image captured by the camera. Further, the input device 5161 includes a microphone capable of picking up the user's voice, and various inputs are performed by voice through the microphone.
  • a glasses-type wearable device or an HMD Head Mounted Display
  • the input device 5161 By configuring the input device 5161 to be able to input various information in a non-contact manner in this way, a user belonging to a clean area (for example, an operator 5181) can operate a device belonging to a dirty area in a non-contact manner. Is possible. In addition, since the user can operate the device without taking his / her hand off the surgical tool he / she has, the convenience of the user is improved.
  • the treatment tool control device 5163 controls the drive of the energy treatment tool 5135 for ablation of tissue, incision, sealing of blood vessels, and the like.
  • the pneumoperitoneum device 5165 gas in the body cavity through the pneumoperitoneum tube 5133 in order to inflate the body cavity of the patient 5185 for the purpose of securing the field of view by the endoscope 5115 and securing the operator's work space.
  • Recorder 5167 is a device capable of recording various information related to surgery.
  • the printer 5169 is a device capable of printing various information related to surgery in various formats such as text, images, and graphs.
  • the support arm device 5141 includes a base portion 5143 that is a base, and an arm portion 5145 that extends from the base portion 5143.
  • the arm portion 5145 is composed of a plurality of joint portions 5147a, 5147b, 5147c and a plurality of links 5149a, 5149b connected by the joint portions 5147b, but in FIG. 23, for simplicity.
  • the configuration of the arm portion 5145 is shown in a simplified manner. Actually, the shapes, numbers and arrangements of the joint portions 5147a to 5147c and the links 5149a and 5149b, and the direction of the rotation axis of the joint portions 5147a to 5147c are appropriately set so that the arm portion 5145 has a desired degree of freedom. obtain.
  • the arm portion 5145 can be preferably configured to have at least 6 degrees of freedom.
  • the endoscope 5115 can be freely moved within the movable range of the arm portion 5145, so that the lens barrel 5117 of the endoscope 5115 can be inserted into the body cavity of the patient 5185 from a desired direction. It will be possible.
  • Actuators are provided in the joint portions 5147a to 5147c, and the joint portions 5147a to 5147c are configured to be rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis by driving the actuator.
  • the arm control device 5159 By controlling the drive of the actuator by the arm control device 5159, the rotation angles of the joint portions 5147a to 5147c are controlled, and the drive of the arm portion 5145 is controlled. Thereby, control of the position and orientation of the endoscope 5115 can be realized.
  • the arm control device 5159 can control the drive of the arm unit 5145 by various known control methods such as force control or position control.
  • the arm control device 5159 appropriately controls the drive of the arm portion 5145 in response to the operation input.
  • the position and orientation of the endoscope 5115 may be controlled.
  • the endoscope 5115 at the tip of the arm portion 5145 can be moved from an arbitrary position to an arbitrary position, and then fixedly supported at the moved position.
  • the arm portion 5145 may be operated by a so-called master slave method. In this case, the arm portion 5145 can be remotely controlled by the user via an input device 5161 installed at a location away from the operating room.
  • the arm control device 5159 When force control is applied, the arm control device 5159 receives an external force from the user and moves the actuators of the joint portions 5147a to 5147c so that the arm portion 5145 moves smoothly according to the external force. So-called power assist control for driving may be performed. As a result, when the user moves the arm portion 5145 while directly touching the arm portion 5145, the arm portion 5145 can be moved with a relatively light force. Therefore, the endoscope 5115 can be moved more intuitively and with a simpler operation, and the convenience of the user can be improved.
  • the endoscope 5115 was supported by a doctor called a scopist.
  • the position of the endoscope 5115 can be fixed more reliably without human intervention, so that an image of the surgical site can be stably obtained. , It becomes possible to perform surgery smoothly.
  • the arm control device 5159 does not necessarily have to be provided on the cart 5151. Further, the arm control device 5159 does not necessarily have to be one device. For example, the arm control device 5159 may be provided at each joint portion 5147a to 5147c of the arm portion 5145 of the support arm device 5141, and a plurality of arm control devices 5159 cooperate with each other to drive the arm portion 5145. Control may be realized.
  • the light source device 5157 supplies the endoscope 5115 with the irradiation light for photographing the surgical site.
  • the light source device 5157 is composed of, for example, an LED, a laser light source, or a white light source composed of a combination thereof.
  • a white light source is configured by combining RGB laser light sources, the output intensity and output timing of each color (each wavelength) can be controlled with high accuracy. Therefore, the light source device 5157 white balances the captured image. Can be adjusted.
  • the laser light from each of the RGB laser light sources is irradiated to the observation target in a time-division manner, and the drive of the image sensor of the camera head 5119 is controlled in synchronization with the irradiation timing to support each of RGB. It is also possible to capture the image in a time-division manner. According to this method, a color image can be obtained without providing a color filter on the image sensor.
  • the drive of the light source device 5157 may be controlled so as to change the intensity of the output light at predetermined time intervals.
  • the drive of the image sensor of the camera head 5119 in synchronization with the timing of the change in the light intensity to acquire images in a time-divided manner and synthesizing the images, so-called high dynamic without blackout and overexposure Range images can be generated.
  • the light source device 5157 may be configured to be able to supply light in a predetermined wavelength band corresponding to special light observation.
  • special light observation for example, by utilizing the wavelength dependence of light absorption in body tissue to irradiate light in a narrow band as compared with the irradiation light (that is, white light) in normal observation, the surface layer of the mucous membrane. So-called narrow band imaging, in which a predetermined tissue such as a blood vessel is photographed with high contrast, is performed.
  • fluorescence observation in which an image is obtained by fluorescence generated by irradiating with excitation light may be performed.
  • the body tissue is irradiated with excitation light to observe the fluorescence from the body tissue (autofluorescence observation), or a reagent such as indocyanine green (ICG) is locally injected into the body tissue and the body tissue is injected.
  • An excitation light corresponding to the fluorescence wavelength of the reagent may be irradiated to obtain a fluorescence image.
  • the light source device 5157 may be configured to be capable of supplying narrow band light and / or excitation light corresponding to such special light observation.
  • FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing an example of the functional configuration of the camera head 5119 and the CCU 5153 shown in FIG. 23.
  • the camera head 5119 has a lens unit 5121, an imaging unit 5123, a driving unit 5125, a communication unit 5127, and a camera head control unit 5129 as its functions.
  • the CCU 5153 has a communication unit 5173, an image processing unit 5175, and a control unit 5177 as its functions.
  • the camera head 5119 and the CCU 5153 are bidirectionally communicatively connected by a transmission cable 5179.
  • the lens unit 5121 is an optical system provided at a connection portion with the lens barrel 5117.
  • the observation light taken in from the tip of the lens barrel 5117 is guided to the camera head 5119 and incident on the lens unit 5121.
  • the lens unit 5121 is configured by combining a plurality of lenses including a zoom lens and a focus lens.
  • the optical characteristics of the lens unit 5121 are adjusted so as to collect the observation light on the light receiving surface of the image sensor of the image pickup unit 5123.
  • the zoom lens and the focus lens are configured so that their positions on the optical axis can be moved in order to adjust the magnification and the focus of the captured image.
  • the image pickup unit 5123 is composed of an image pickup element and is arranged after the lens unit 5121.
  • the observation light that has passed through the lens unit 5121 is focused on the light receiving surface of the image sensor, and an image signal corresponding to the observation image is generated by photoelectric conversion.
  • the image signal generated by the imaging unit 5123 is provided to the communication unit 5127.
  • CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor
  • image sensor for example, an image sensor capable of capturing a high-resolution image of 4K or higher may be used.
  • the image pickup elements constituting the image pickup unit 5123 are configured to have a pair of image pickup elements for acquiring image signals for the right eye and the left eye corresponding to 3D display, respectively.
  • the 3D display enables the operator 5181 to more accurately grasp the depth of the biological tissue in the surgical site.
  • the image pickup unit 5123 is composed of a multi-plate type, a plurality of lens units 5121 are also provided corresponding to each image pickup element.
  • the imaging unit 5123 does not necessarily have to be provided on the camera head 5119.
  • the imaging unit 5123 may be provided inside the lens barrel 5117 immediately after the objective lens.
  • the drive unit 5125 is composed of an actuator, and the zoom lens and focus lens of the lens unit 5121 are moved by a predetermined distance along the optical axis under the control of the camera head control unit 5129. As a result, the magnification and focus of the image captured by the imaging unit 5123 can be adjusted as appropriate.
  • the communication unit 5127 is composed of a communication device for transmitting and receiving various information to and from the CCU 5153.
  • the communication unit 5127 transmits the image signal obtained from the image pickup unit 5123 as RAW data to the CCU 5153 via the transmission cable 5179.
  • the image signal is transmitted by optical communication.
  • the surgeon 5181 performs the surgery while observing the condition of the affected area with the captured image, so for safer and more reliable surgery, the moving image of the surgical site is displayed in real time as much as possible. This is because it is required.
  • the communication unit 5127 is provided with a photoelectric conversion module that converts an electric signal into an optical signal.
  • the image signal is converted into an optical signal by the photoelectric conversion module and then transmitted to the CCU 5153 via the transmission cable 5179.
  • the communication unit 5127 receives a control signal for controlling the drive of the camera head 5119 from the CCU 5153.
  • the control signal includes, for example, information to specify the frame rate of the captured image, information to specify the exposure value at the time of imaging, and / or information to specify the magnification and focus of the captured image. Contains information about the condition.
  • the communication unit 5127 provides the received control signal to the camera head control unit 5129.
  • the control signal from CCU5153 may also be transmitted by optical communication.
  • the communication unit 5127 is provided with a photoelectric conversion module that converts an optical signal into an electric signal, and the control signal is converted into an electric signal by the photoelectric conversion module and then provided to the camera head control unit 5129.
  • the above imaging conditions such as frame rate, exposure value, magnification, focus, etc. are automatically set by the control unit 5177 of CCU5153 based on the acquired image signal. That is, the so-called AE (Auto Exposure) function, AF (Auto Focus) function, and AWB (Auto White Balance) function are mounted on the endoscope 5115.
  • AE Auto Exposure
  • AF Automatic Focus
  • AWB Automatic White Balance
  • the camera head control unit 5129 controls the drive of the camera head 5119 based on the control signal from the CCU 5153 received via the communication unit 5127. For example, the camera head control unit 5129 controls the drive of the image sensor of the image pickup unit 5123 based on the information to specify the frame rate of the captured image and / or the information to specify the exposure at the time of imaging. Further, for example, the camera head control unit 5129 appropriately moves the zoom lens and the focus lens of the lens unit 5121 via the drive unit 5125 based on the information that the magnification and the focus of the captured image are specified.
  • the camera head control unit 5129 may further have a function of storing information for identifying the lens barrel 5117 and the camera head 5119.
  • the camera head 5119 can be made resistant to autoclave sterilization.
  • the communication unit 5173 is composed of a communication device for transmitting and receiving various information to and from the camera head 5119.
  • the communication unit 5173 receives an image signal transmitted from the camera head 5119 via the transmission cable 5179.
  • the image signal can be suitably transmitted by optical communication.
  • the communication unit 5173 is provided with a photoelectric conversion module that converts an optical signal into an electric signal.
  • the communication unit 5173 provides the image processing unit 5175 with an image signal converted into an electric signal.
  • the communication unit 5173 transmits a control signal for controlling the drive of the camera head 5119 to the camera head 5119.
  • the control signal may also be transmitted by optical communication.
  • the image processing unit 5175 performs various image processing on the image signal which is the RAW data transmitted from the camera head 5119.
  • the image processing includes, for example, development processing, high image quality processing (band enhancement processing, super-resolution processing, NR (Noise reduction) processing and / or camera shake correction processing, etc.), and / or enlargement processing (electronic zoom processing). Etc., various known signal processing is included.
  • the image processing unit 5175 performs detection processing on the image signal for performing AE, AF, and AWB.
  • the image processing unit 5175 is composed of a processor such as a CPU or GPU, and the above-mentioned image processing and detection processing can be performed by operating the processor according to a predetermined program.
  • the image processing unit 5175 is composed of a plurality of GPUs, the image processing unit 5175 appropriately divides the information related to the image signal and performs image processing in parallel by the plurality of GPUs.
  • the control unit 5177 performs various controls related to the imaging of the surgical site by the endoscope 5115 and the display of the captured image. For example, the control unit 5177 generates a control signal for controlling the drive of the camera head 5119. At this time, when the imaging condition is input by the user, the control unit 5177 generates a control signal based on the input by the user. Alternatively, when the endoscope 5115 is equipped with the AE function, the AF function, and the AWB function, the control unit 5177 determines the optimum exposure value, focal length, and the optimum exposure value, depending on the result of the detection processing by the image processing unit 5175. The white balance is calculated appropriately and a control signal is generated.
  • control unit 5177 causes the display device 5155 to display the image of the surgical unit based on the image signal that has been image-processed by the image processing unit 5175.
  • the control unit 5177 recognizes various objects in the surgical site image by using various image recognition techniques. For example, the control unit 5177 detects the shape, color, etc. of the edge of the object included in the surgical site image to detect surgical tools such as forceps, a specific biological part, bleeding, mist when using the energy treatment tool 5135, and the like. Can be recognized.
  • the control unit 5177 uses the recognition result to superimpose and display various surgical support information on the image of the surgical site. By superimposing the operation support information and presenting it to the operator 5181, it becomes possible to proceed with the operation more safely and surely.
  • the transmission cable 5179 that connects the camera head 5119 and the CCU 5153 is an electric signal cable that supports electric signal communication, an optical fiber that supports optical communication, or a composite cable thereof.
  • the communication is performed by wire using the transmission cable 5179, but the communication between the camera head 5119 and the CCU 5153 may be performed wirelessly.
  • the communication between the two is performed wirelessly, it is not necessary to lay the transmission cable 5179 in the operating room, so that the situation where the movement of the medical staff in the operating room is hindered by the transmission cable 5179 can be solved.
  • the example of the operating room system 5100 to which the technology according to the present disclosure can be applied has been described above.
  • the medical system to which the operating room system 5100 is applied is the endoscopic surgery system 5113
  • the configuration of the operating room system 5100 is not limited to such an example.
  • the operating room system 5100 may be applied to an examination flexible endoscopic system or a microsurgery system instead of the endoscopic surgery system 5113.
  • the present technology can be configured as follows.
  • Both sides of the coil arrangement portion in the thickness direction are formed as a first arrangement surface and a second arrangement surface, respectively.
  • the winding portion is arranged on the first arrangement surface, A drive motor in which the magnetic detection element is arranged on the second arrangement surface.
  • connection terminal is formed in the circuit pattern.
  • connection portion passes through the outside of the outer peripheral surface of the coil arrangement portion and is folded back.
  • a bearing that rotatably supports the support shaft is provided.
  • the drive motor according to any one of (1) to (4) above, wherein the bearing is formed by sintering.
  • a base yoke to which the magnet is attached and an opposing yoke in which an arrangement hole in which the magnetic detection element is arranged are formed and located on the opposite side of the magnet with the coil arrangement portion interposed therebetween are provided.
  • the drive motor according to any one of (1) to (5) above, wherein an auxiliary yoke is provided which is attached to the facing yoke and covers the arrangement hole.
  • a lens unit that is rotated in at least one direction orthogonal to the optical axis of the lens with respect to the outer casing, It is equipped with a drive motor that rotates the lens unit.
  • the drive motor A substrate on which a circuit pattern is formed and having a coil arrangement portion, A plurality of coils having an annularly formed winding portion and a pair of connecting portions drawn out from the winding portion and arranged in the circumferential direction with the winding portion arranged in the coil arrangement portion.
  • the winding portion is arranged on the first arrangement surface,
  • An image blur correction device in which the magnetic detection element is arranged on the second arrangement surface.
  • the drive motor A substrate on which a circuit pattern is formed and having a coil arrangement portion, A plurality of coils having an annularly formed winding portion and a pair of connecting portions drawn out from the winding portion and arranged in the circumferential direction with the winding portion arranged in the coil arrangement portion.
  • the winding portion is arranged on the first arrangement surface,
  • Image pickup device 2 Outer housing 15 Image blur correction device 19
  • Lens unit 44 Drive motor 44A First drive motor 44B Second drive motor 45
  • Base yoke 46 Magnet 47 Coil 48
  • Opposing yoke 48b Arrangement hole 50
  • First placement surface 58 Second placement surface 59
  • Connection terminal part 60
  • Magnetic detection element 62 Auxiliary yoke 44X Drive motor 47X Coil 50X Bearing 51X Support shaft 52X Winding unit 100 Imaging device 110 Imaging element

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Lens Barrels (AREA)
  • Adjustment Of Camera Lenses (AREA)
  • Studio Devices (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention comprises: a substrate having a coil arrangement part in which a circuit pattern is formed; a plurality of coils each having a winding part formed in an annular shape, and a pair of connection parts drawn out from the winding part, the plurality of coils being aligned in the circumferential direction when the winding part is arranged on the coil arrangement part; an annular magnet positioned facing the plurality of coils; a magnetic detection element that detects the relative position of the magnet in the rotation direction in relation to the coils; and a pivot used as a rotation pivot point, the two thickness-direction surfaces of the coil arrangement part being formed, respectively, as a first arrangement surface and a second arrangement surface, the winding parts being arranged on the first arrangement surface, and the magnetic detection element being arranged on the second arrangement surface.

Description

駆動モーター、像ぶれ補正装置及び撮像装置Drive motor, image blur correction device and image pickup device
 本技術はコイルとマグネットを有する磁気回路によって駆動力を発生する駆動モーター、像ぶれ補正装置及び撮像装置についての技術分野に関する。 This technology relates to the technical field of a drive motor, an image blur correction device, and an image pickup device that generate a driving force by a magnetic circuit having a coil and a magnet.
 ビデオカメラやスチルカメラ等に代表される各種の撮像装置等の電子機器や電動機には、駆動部として、対向して位置された複数のコイルとマグネットを有し、コイルに電流が供給されたときにマグネットとの関係において駆動力(推力)を発生する駆動モーターが用いられたものがある。 Electronic devices and electric motors such as various image pickup devices represented by video cameras and still cameras have a plurality of coils and magnets located opposite to each other as a drive unit, and when a current is supplied to the coils. In some cases, a drive motor that generates a driving force (thrust) in relation to a magnet is used.
 このような駆動モーターは、例えば、撮像装置においてレンズを光軸方向に直交する方向へ移動させて像ぶれの補正を行う像ぶれ補正装置の駆動部として設けられているものがある。 Such a drive motor is provided, for example, as a drive unit of an image blur correction device that corrects image blur by moving a lens in a direction orthogonal to the optical axis direction in an image pickup device.
 撮像装置に設けられた像ぶれ補正装置には、レンズを有するレンズユニットが外筐に対してレンズの光軸に直交する第1の支点軸の軸回り方向である第1の方向と光軸及び第1の支点軸にともに直交する第2の支点軸の軸回り方向である第2の方向とに回動可能とされたものがある(例えば、特許文献1参照)。 In the image blur correction device provided in the image pickup device, the lens unit having the lens has a first direction and an optical axis which are axial directions of a first fulcrum axis orthogonal to the optical axis of the lens with respect to the outer casing. Some lenses are rotatable in the second direction, which is the axial direction of the second fulcrum axis, which is orthogonal to the first fulcrum axis (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
 レンズユニットは第1の支点軸を支点としてヨーイング方向へ回動されると共に第2の支点軸を支点としてピッチング方向へ回動され、像ぶれの補正が行われる。 The lens unit is rotated in the yawing direction with the first fulcrum axis as the fulcrum and is rotated in the pitching direction with the second fulcrum axis as the fulcrum to correct the image blur.
 特許文献1に記載された像ぶれ補正装置にあっては、レンズユニットをヨーイング方向及びピッチング方向へ回動させるための駆動部として、複数のコイル、マグネット及びヨークをそれぞれ有する二つの駆動モーター(扁平モーター)が用いられている。複数のコイルは支点軸の軸回り方向(周方向)において並んで配置され、マグネットは支点軸の軸回り方向(周方向)においてN極とS極の磁極が交互に着磁されている。各駆動モーターの出力軸の軸方向はそれぞれ第1の支点軸及び第2の支点軸に一致されている。 In the image blur correction device described in Patent Document 1, two drive motors (flat) each having a plurality of coils, magnets, and yokes as drive units for rotating the lens unit in the yawing direction and the pitching direction. Motor) is used. A plurality of coils are arranged side by side in the axial direction (circumferential direction) of the fulcrum axis, and the magnets are magnetized with magnetic poles of N pole and S pole alternately in the axial direction (circumferential direction) of the fulcrum axis. The axial direction of the output shaft of each drive motor coincides with the first fulcrum shaft and the second fulcrum shaft, respectively.
 駆動モーターはコイルとマグネットが対向して配置され、コイルに電流が供給されたときにマグネットとの関係において発生する推力を用いてレンズユニットをヨーイング方向及びピッチング方向へ回動させるようにしている。 The drive motor is arranged so that the coil and the magnet face each other, and the lens unit is rotated in the yawing direction and the pitching direction by using the thrust generated in relation to the magnet when a current is supplied to the coil.
 一方の駆動モーターは、例えば、レンズユニットの上面側に上下方向を向く向きで配置され、コイルに電流が供給されたときに電流の供給方向に応じてレンズユニットをヨーイング方向へ回動させるように構成されている。他方の駆動モーターは、例えば、レンズユニットの側面側に左右方向を向く向きで配置され、コイルに電流が供給されたときに電流の供給方向に応じてレンズユニットをピッチング方向へ回動させるように構成されている。 One drive motor is arranged on the upper surface side of the lens unit in a vertical direction, for example, so that when a current is supplied to the coil, the lens unit is rotated in the yawing direction according to the current supply direction. It is configured. The other drive motor is arranged, for example, on the side surface side of the lens unit so as to face the left-right direction, and when a current is supplied to the coil, the lens unit is rotated in the pitching direction according to the current supply direction. It is configured.
 一方、駆動モーターにはマグネットのコイルに対する回転方向における相対的な位置検出を行う磁気検出素子、例えば、ホール素子が設けられ、磁気検出素子による検出結果に応じて各部が制御される構成にされたものがある。 On the other hand, the drive motor is provided with a magnetic detection element that detects the position of the magnet relative to the coil in the rotation direction, for example, a Hall element, and each part is controlled according to the detection result by the magnetic detection element. There is something.
 例えば、特許文献1に記載された像ぶれ補正装置にあっては、磁気検出素子が基板上に配置され、同じ基板上に周方向において複数のコイルが並んだ状態で配置されている。 For example, in the image blur correction device described in Patent Document 1, a magnetic detection element is arranged on a substrate, and a plurality of coils are arranged in a circumferential direction on the same substrate.
特開2013-140284号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-14284
 ところで、近年、撮像装置等の電子機器は携帯性等をも考慮して小型化される傾向にあり、その分、内部に配置される駆動モーターも小型化が進展されているが、駆動モーターにおいては小型化された状況においても駆動力の向上が図られることが望ましい。 By the way, in recent years, electronic devices such as image pickup devices have tended to be miniaturized in consideration of portability and the like, and the drive motors arranged inside have also been miniaturized accordingly. It is desirable that the driving force can be improved even in a miniaturized situation.
 一方、駆動モーターにおいては、マグネットの回転位置に関する適正な検出状態を確保して、動作の信頼性が確保されることも望まれている。 On the other hand, in the drive motor, it is also desired to secure an appropriate detection state regarding the rotation position of the magnet to ensure the reliability of operation.
 そこで、本技術駆動モーター、像ぶれ補正装置及び撮像装置は、マグネットの回転位置に関する適正な検出状態を確保した上で駆動力の向上を図ることを課題とする。 Therefore, it is an object of the present technology drive motor, image blur correction device, and image pickup device to improve the driving force after ensuring an appropriate detection state regarding the rotation position of the magnet.
 第1に、本技術に係る駆動モーターは、回路パターンが形成されコイル配置部を有する基板と、環状に形成された巻回部と前記巻回部から引き出された一対の接続部とを有し前記巻回部が前記コイル配置部に配置された状態で周方向において並ぶ複数のコイルと、前記複数のコイルに対向して位置された環状のマグネットと、前記マグネットの前記コイルに対する回転方向における相対的な位置検出を行う磁気検出素子と、回転支点とされる支軸とを備え、前記コイル配置部の厚み方向における両面がそれぞれ第1の配置面と第2の配置面として形成され、前記巻回部が前記第1の配置面に配置され、前記磁気検出素子が前記第2の配置面に配置されたものである。 First, the drive motor according to the present technology has a substrate on which a circuit pattern is formed and has a coil arrangement portion, a winding portion formed in an annular shape, and a pair of connecting portions drawn out from the winding portion. A plurality of coils arranged in the circumferential direction with the winding portion arranged in the coil arrangement portion, an annular magnet located facing the plurality of coils, and a relative of the magnet in the rotation direction with respect to the coil. A magnetic detection element for detecting a specific position and a support shaft serving as a rotation fulcrum are provided, and both sides of the coil arrangement portion in the thickness direction are formed as a first arrangement surface and a second arrangement surface, respectively. The coil is arranged on the first arrangement surface, and the magnetic detection element is arranged on the second arrangement surface.
 これにより、コイル配置部の厚み方向における両面である第1の配置面と第2の配置面にそれぞれ複数のコイルと磁気検出素子が配置され、第1の配置面に磁気検出素子を配置するためのスペースが不要になる。 As a result, a plurality of coils and magnetic detection elements are arranged on the first arrangement surface and the second arrangement surface, which are both sides in the thickness direction of the coil arrangement portion, respectively, and the magnetic detection elements are arranged on the first arrangement surface. Space is not required.
 第2に、上記した駆動モーターにおいては、前記回路パターンに接続端子部が形成され、前記接続部の先端部が前記第2の配置面において前記接続端子部に接続されることが望ましい。 Secondly, in the drive motor described above, it is desirable that a connection terminal portion is formed in the circuit pattern and the tip portion of the connection portion is connected to the connection terminal portion on the second arrangement surface.
 これにより、コイル配置部の第1の配置面側に接続部の先端部が存在しないため、その分、基板における第1の配置面の配置スペースを大きくすることが可能になる。 As a result, since the tip end portion of the connecting portion does not exist on the first arrangement surface side of the coil arrangement portion, it is possible to increase the arrangement space of the first arrangement surface on the substrate by that amount.
 第3に、上記した駆動モーターにおいては、前記接続部が前記コイル配置部の外周面の外側を通り折り返された状態にされることが望ましい。 Thirdly, in the above-mentioned drive motor, it is desirable that the connection portion passes through the outside of the outer peripheral surface of the coil arrangement portion and is folded back.
 これにより、接続部がコイル配置部の外周面の外側を通って接続端子部に接続されるため、基板に接続部を挿通する挿通孔を形成する必要がない。 As a result, the connection portion is connected to the connection terminal portion through the outside of the outer peripheral surface of the coil arrangement portion, so that it is not necessary to form an insertion hole for inserting the connection portion in the substrate.
 第4に、上記した駆動モーターにおいては、前記磁気検出素子が周方向において隣り合う前記接続部の間に位置されることが望ましい。 Fourth, in the drive motor described above, it is desirable that the magnetic detection element is located between the connecting portions adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction.
 これにより、接続部と磁気検出素子が径方向において並ぶ位置関係にならない。 As a result, the connection part and the magnetic detection element are not aligned in the radial direction.
 第5に、上記した駆動モーターにおいては、前記支軸を回転可能に支持する軸受が設けられ、前記軸受が焼結により形成されることが望ましい。 Fifth, in the above-mentioned drive motor, it is desirable that a bearing for rotatably supporting the support shaft is provided, and the bearing is formed by sintering.
 これにより、ベアリングを用いることなく軸を支持する構造を構成することが可能になる。 This makes it possible to construct a structure that supports the shaft without using bearings.
 第6に、上記した駆動モーターにおいては、前記マグネットが取り付けられるベースヨークと前記磁気検出素子が配置される配置孔が形成され前記コイル配置部を挟んで前記マグネットの反対側に位置される対向ヨークとが設けられ、前記対向ヨークに取り付けられ前記配置孔を覆う補助ヨークが設けられることが望ましい。 Sixth, in the drive motor described above, a base yoke to which the magnet is attached and an arrangement hole in which the magnetic detection element is arranged are formed, and an opposing yoke located on the opposite side of the magnet with the coil arrangement portion interposed therebetween. It is desirable that an auxiliary yoke is provided which is attached to the facing yoke and covers the arrangement hole.
 これにより、補助ヨークによって配置孔が覆われて閉磁路が形成される。 As a result, the placement hole is covered with the auxiliary yoke to form a closed magnetic path.
 第7に、上記した駆動モーターにおいては、前記基板として前記コイル配置部から導出され所定の方向に延びる導電部を有するフレキシブルプリント配線板が用いられることが望ましい。 Seventh, in the above-mentioned drive motor, it is desirable to use a flexible printed wiring board as the substrate, which has a conductive portion derived from the coil arrangement portion and extending in a predetermined direction.
 これにより、導電部がコイル配置部から導出された構成にされているため、導電部を屈曲可能な状態で位置させることが可能になる。 As a result, since the conductive portion is derived from the coil arrangement portion, the conductive portion can be positioned in a bendable state.
 第8に、本技術に係るぶれ補正装置は、外筐に対してレンズの光軸に直交する少なくとも一方向へ回動されるレンズユニットと、前記レンズユニットを回動させる駆動モーターとを備え、前記駆動モーターは、回路パターンが形成されコイル配置部を有する基板と、環状に形成された巻回部と前記巻回部から引き出された一対の接続部とを有し前記巻回部が前記コイル配置部に配置された状態で周方向において並ぶ複数のコイルと、前記複数のコイルに対向して位置された環状のマグネットと、前記マグネットの前記コイルに対する回転方向における相対的な位置検出を行う磁気検出素子と、回転支点とされる支軸とを備え、前記コイル配置部の厚み方向における両面がそれぞれ第1の配置面と第2の配置面として形成され、前記巻回部が前記第1の配置面に配置され、前記磁気検出素子が前記第2の配置面に配置されたものである。 Eighth, the blur correction device according to the present technology includes a lens unit that is rotated in at least one direction orthogonal to the optical axis of the lens with respect to the outer casing, and a drive motor that rotates the lens unit. The drive motor has a substrate on which a circuit pattern is formed and has a coil arrangement portion, a winding portion formed in an annular shape, and a pair of connecting portions drawn out from the winding portion, and the winding portion is the coil. A plurality of coils arranged in the circumferential direction while being arranged in the arrangement portion, an annular magnet located facing the plurality of coils, and a magnet that detects the position of the magnet relative to the coil in the rotation direction. A detection element and a support shaft serving as a rotation fulcrum are provided, and both sides of the coil arrangement portion in the thickness direction are formed as a first arrangement surface and a second arrangement surface, respectively, and the winding portion is the first arrangement surface. It is arranged on the arrangement surface, and the magnetic detection element is arranged on the second arrangement surface.
 これにより、駆動モーターにおいて、コイル配置部の厚み方向における両面である第1の配置面と第2の配置面にそれぞれ複数のコイルと磁気検出素子が配置され、第1の配置面に磁気検出素子を配置するためのスペースが不要になる。 As a result, in the drive motor, a plurality of coils and magnetic detection elements are arranged on the first arrangement surface and the second arrangement surface, which are both sides in the thickness direction of the coil arrangement portion, respectively, and the magnetic detection element is arranged on the first arrangement surface. No space is required to place the.
 第9に、本技術に係る撮像装置は、光学像を取り込むレンズ鏡筒と、取り込まれた光学像を電気的信号に変換する撮像素子と、外筐に対してレンズの光軸に直交する少なくとも一方向へ回動されるレンズユニットと、前記レンズユニットを回動させる駆動モーターとを備え、前記駆動モーターは、回路パターンが形成されコイル配置部を有する基板と、環状に形成された巻回部と前記巻回部から引き出された一対の接続部とを有し前記巻回部が前記コイル配置部に配置された状態で周方向において並ぶ複数のコイルと、前記複数のコイルに対向して位置された環状のマグネットと、前記マグネットの前記コイルに対する回転方向における相対的な位置検出を行う磁気検出素子と、回転支点とされる支軸とを備え、前記コイル配置部の厚み方向における両面がそれぞれ第1の配置面と第2の配置面として形成され、前記巻回部が前記第1の配置面に配置され、前記磁気検出素子が前記第2の配置面に配置されたものである。 Ninth, the imaging apparatus according to the present technology includes a lens barrel that captures an optical image, an imaging element that converts the captured optical image into an electrical signal, and at least an imager orthogonal to the optical axis of the lens with respect to the outer casing. The drive motor includes a lens unit that is rotated in one direction and a drive motor that rotates the lens unit. The drive motor has a substrate on which a circuit pattern is formed and has a coil arrangement portion, and a winding portion formed in an annular shape. And a pair of connecting portions drawn out from the winding portion, and a plurality of coils arranged in the circumferential direction with the winding portion arranged in the coil arrangement portion, and positions facing the plurality of coils. An annular magnet, a magnetic detection element that detects the position of the magnet relative to the coil in the rotation direction, and a support shaft serving as a rotation fulcrum are provided, and both sides of the coil arrangement portion in the thickness direction are provided. It is formed as a first arrangement surface and a second arrangement surface, the winding portion is arranged on the first arrangement surface, and the magnetic detection element is arranged on the second arrangement surface.
 これにより、駆動モーターにおいて、コイル配置部の厚み方向における両面である第1の配置面と第2の配置面にそれぞれ複数のコイルと磁気検出素子が配置され、第1の配置面に磁気検出素子を配置するためのスペースが不要になる。 As a result, in the drive motor, a plurality of coils and magnetic detection elements are arranged on the first arrangement surface and the second arrangement surface, which are both sides in the thickness direction of the coil arrangement portion, respectively, and the magnetic detection element is arranged on the first arrangement surface. No space is required to place the.
図2乃至図24と共に本技術駆動モーター、ぶれ補正装置及び撮像装置を示すものであり、本図は、撮像装置の斜視図である。Along with FIGS. 2 to 24, the drive motor, the blur correction device, and the image pickup device of the present technology are shown, and this figure is a perspective view of the image pickup device. 図1とは異なる方向から見た状態で示す撮像装置の斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the image pickup apparatus which shows the state seen from the direction different from FIG. 像ぶれ補正装置を示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows the image blur correction apparatus. 外フレーム、内フレーム、保持フレーム及びレンズユニットを分離して示す像ぶれ補正装置の分解斜視図である。It is an exploded perspective view of the image blur correction apparatus which shows the outer frame, the inner frame, the holding frame and the lens unit separately. 像ぶれ補正装置の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the image blur correction apparatus. 駆動モーターの分解斜視図である。It is an exploded perspective view of a drive motor. コイルの配置状態を示す底面図である。It is a bottom view which shows the arrangement state of a coil. 図7のVIII-VIII線に沿う駆動モーターの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the drive motor along the line VIII-VIII of FIG. 図7のIX-IX線に沿う駆動モーターの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the drive motor along the IX-IX line of FIG. コイルが基板に配置された状態を示す拡大斜視図である。It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the coil is arranged on the substrate. 磁気検出素子の配置状態を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows the arrangement state of a magnetic detection element. マグネットとコイルの位置関係を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the positional relationship of a magnet and a coil. レンズユニットがヨーイング方向へ回動されている状態を示す概略平面図である。It is a schematic plan view which shows the state which the lens unit is rotated in the yawing direction. レンズユニットがピッチング方向へ回動されている状態を示す概略平面図である。It is a schematic plan view which shows the state which the lens unit is rotated in a pitching direction. 補助ヨークを取り外した状態で示す変形例に係る駆動モーターの平面図である。It is a top view of the drive motor which concerns on the modification which shows in the state which the auxiliary yoke is removed. 変形例に係る駆動モーターにおけるコイルの配置状態を示す底面図である。It is a bottom view which shows the arrangement state of the coil in the drive motor which concerns on a modification. 変形例に係る駆動モーターを示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the drive motor which concerns on the modification. 撮像装置のブロック図である。It is a block diagram of an image pickup apparatus. 車両制御システムの概略的な構成の一例を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows an example of the schematic structure of a vehicle control system. 車外情報検出部及び撮像部の設置位置の一例を示す説明図である。It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the installation position of the vehicle exterior information detection unit and the image pickup unit. 手術室システムの全体構成を概略的に示す図である。It is a figure which shows the whole structure of the operating room system roughly. 集中操作パネルにおける操作画面の表示例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the display example of the operation screen in a centralized operation panel. 手術室システムが適用された手術の様子の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the state of the operation which applied the operating room system. 図23に示すカメラヘッド及びCCUの機能構成の一例を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows an example of the functional structure of the camera head and CCU shown in FIG.
 以下に、本技術駆動モーター、像ぶれ補正装置及び撮像装置を実施するための形態を添付図面に従って説明する。 Hereinafter, modes for implementing the present technology drive motor, image blur correction device, and image pickup device will be described with reference to the attached drawings.
 以下に示した発明を実施するための形態は、本技術撮像装置をビデオカメラに適用し、本技術像ぶれ補正装置をこのビデオカメラに設けられた像ぶれ補正装置に適用し、本技術駆動モーターをこの像ぶれ補正装置の駆動を行うための駆動モーターに適用したものである。 In the embodiment for carrying out the invention shown below, the present technology imaging device is applied to a video camera, the present technology image blur correction device is applied to the image blur correction device provided in this video camera, and the present technology drive motor. Is applied to the drive motor for driving this image blur correction device.
 尚、本技術撮像装置、像ぶれ補正装置及び駆動モーターの適用範囲はそれぞれビデオカメラ、ビデオカメラに設けられた像ぶれ補正装置及び像ぶれ補正装置の駆動を行うための駆動モーターに限られることはない。本技術撮像装置、像ぶれ補正装置及び駆動モーターは、例えば、スチルカメラ、携帯電話や携帯情報端末等の各種の電子機器に組み込まれた撮像装置又はこれらの撮像装置に設けられた像ぶれ補正装置若しくはこれらの電子機器において用いられる駆動モーターに広く適用することができる。 The applicable range of the image pickup device, the image blur correction device, and the drive motor of the present technology is limited to the drive motor for driving the image blur correction device and the image blur correction device provided in the video camera and the video camera, respectively. Absent. The image pickup device, image blur correction device, and drive motor of the present technology are, for example, an image pickup device incorporated in various electronic devices such as a still camera, a mobile phone, and a mobile information terminal, or an image blur correction device provided in these image pickup devices. Alternatively, it can be widely applied to drive motors used in these electronic devices.
 また、本技術に係る駆動モーターは適用範囲が限定されることはなく、例えば、自動車等の車両に設けられる開閉式のミラー等の駆動部、ロボットにおける駆動部、飛行するドローンにおける駆動部、撮影機能を有する携帯機器等が装着され3軸方向へ可動する可動部を有するハンディ型の機器における駆動部、3軸方向へ可動する可動部を有するカメラ一体型の機器における駆動部等にも適用することが可能である。 Further, the applicable range of the drive motor according to the present technology is not limited. For example, a drive unit such as an openable mirror provided in a vehicle such as an automobile, a drive unit in a robot, a drive unit in a flying drone, and photography. It is also applied to the drive unit of a handy type device that is equipped with a mobile device with a function and has a movable part that can move in three axial directions, and the drive unit of a camera-integrated device that has a movable part that can move in three axial directions. It is possible.
 以下の説明にあっては、ビデオカメラの撮影時において撮影者から見た方向で前後上下左右の方向を示すものとする。従って、被写体側が前方となり、撮影者側が後方となる。 In the following explanation, the direction as seen from the photographer at the time of shooting with the video camera shall be indicated in the front-back, up-down, left-right directions. Therefore, the subject side is the front side and the photographer side is the rear side.
 尚、以下に示す前後上下左右の方向は説明の便宜上のものであり、本技術の実施に関しては、これらの方向に限定されることはない。 The directions shown below are for convenience of explanation, and the implementation of the present technology is not limited to these directions.
 また、以下に示すレンズは、単一のレンズによって構成されているもの及び複数のレンズによりレンズ群として構成されているものの両者を含む意味である。 In addition, the lens shown below is meant to include both a lens composed of a single lens and a lens group composed of a plurality of lenses.
 <撮像装置の全体構成>
 撮像装置1は外筐2の内外に所要の各部が配置されて成る(図1及び図2参照)。外筐2は、例えば、前後方向に長いケース状に形成され、前端部がフロントパネル部3として設けられ、後端部における上端部が後方に開口された収納ケース部4として設けられている。
<Overall configuration of imaging device>
The image pickup apparatus 1 is formed by arranging necessary parts inside and outside the outer casing 2 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). The outer housing 2 is formed, for example, in a case shape long in the front-rear direction, the front end portion is provided as the front panel portion 3, and the upper end portion at the rear end portion is provided as the storage case portion 4 opened rearward.
 外筐2の上面2aにはマイクロフォン5、5、インターフェースカバー6及び操作スイッチ7、7が前側から順に配置されている。操作スイッチ7、7は、例えば、ズームレバーと撮影釦である。 Microphones 5, 5 and interface covers 6 and operation switches 7 and 7 are arranged in order from the front side on the upper surface 2a of the outer casing 2. The operation switches 7 and 7 are, for example, a zoom lever and a shooting button.
 外筐2の一方の側面2bには電源釦、画像再生釦等の各種の操作釦8、8、・・・が配置されている。外筐2の一方の側面2bにはメモリーカード9が装着される。 Various operation buttons 8, 8, ... Such as a power button and an image reproduction button are arranged on one side surface 2b of the outer casing 2. A memory card 9 is mounted on one side surface 2b of the outer casing 2.
 外筐2の後面2cにはモード切替釦や録画釦等の操作釦10、10が配置されている。 Operation buttons 10 and 10 such as a mode switching button and a recording button are arranged on the rear surface 2c of the outer casing 2.
 外筐2の後面2cにはバッテリー11が装着され、バッテリー11は一部が外筐2の後面2cより後方へ突出される。 A battery 11 is mounted on the rear surface 2c of the outer casing 2, and a part of the battery 11 projects rearward from the rear surface 2c of the outer casing 2.
 フロントパネル部3の上端部にはフラッシュ12が配置されている。フラッシュ12は夜間撮影時等に用いられ、フラッシュ12からは補助光が前方へ向けて出射される。 A flash 12 is arranged at the upper end of the front panel portion 3. The flash 12 is used for nighttime shooting and the like, and auxiliary light is emitted from the flash 12 toward the front.
 外筐2の側面部には表示部13が回動可能かつ回転可能に連結されている。表示部13は前端部が外筐2に連結され、表示面13aを有している。 A display unit 13 is rotatably and rotatably connected to the side surface of the outer casing 2. The front end of the display 13 is connected to the outer casing 2 and has a display surface 13a.
 撮像装置1の後端部にはファインダー14が連結され、ファインダー14は収納ケース部4に対して前後方向へスライド可能及びチルト方向へ回動可能とされている。 A finder 14 is connected to the rear end of the image pickup device 1, and the finder 14 is slidable in the front-rear direction and rotatable in the tilt direction with respect to the storage case portion 4.
 ファインダー14は、後端部を除いた部分が収納ケース部4に収納される収納位置と収納ケース部4から引き出される引出位置との間でスライド可能とされている。また、ファインダー14は引出位置において前端部を支点としてチルト方向へ回動可能とされている。 The finder 14 is slidable between a storage position in which the portion excluding the rear end is stored in the storage case 4 and a drawer position in which the finder 14 is pulled out from the storage case 4. Further, the finder 14 is rotatable in the tilt direction with the front end as a fulcrum at the drawer position.
 <像ぶれ補正装置の構成>
 外筐2の内部には像ぶれ補正装置15が配置されている(図3乃至図5参照)。像ぶれ補正装置15は外フレーム16と内フレーム17と保持フレーム18とレンズユニット19を有している。外フレーム16と内フレーム17と保持フレーム18は全体としてそれぞれ枠状に形成されている。
<Configuration of image blur correction device>
An image blur correction device 15 is arranged inside the outer casing 2 (see FIGS. 3 to 5). The image blur correction device 15 has an outer frame 16, an inner frame 17, a holding frame 18, and a lens unit 19. The outer frame 16, the inner frame 17, and the holding frame 18 are formed in a frame shape as a whole.
 外フレーム16は第1の部材20と第2の部材21とが結合されて構成されている。 The outer frame 16 is configured by connecting the first member 20 and the second member 21.
 第1の部材20は上下方向を向く第1の面部22と左右方向を向く第2の面部23とから成り、第1の面部22の右端部と第2の面部23の上端部とが連続されている。第1の面部22の中央部には貫通孔22aが形成されている。第2の面部23は前後に位置し略上下に延びる一対の柱部24、24と柱部24、24の各下端部を連結し前後に延びる連設部25とを有している。 The first member 20 is composed of a first surface portion 22 facing in the vertical direction and a second surface portion 23 facing in the horizontal direction, and a right end portion of the first surface portion 22 and an upper end portion of the second surface portion 23 are continuous. ing. A through hole 22a is formed in the central portion of the first surface portion 22. The second surface portion 23 has a pair of pillar portions 24, 24 that are located in the front-rear direction and extend substantially vertically, and a continuous portion 25 that connects the lower end portions of the pillar portions 24, 24 and extends in the front-rear direction.
 第2の部材21は上下方向を向く第1の面状部26と左右方向を向く第2の面状部27とから成り、第1の面状部26の左端部と第2の面状部27の下端部とが連続されている。第1の面状部26の中央部には取付孔26aが形成されている。第2の面状部27の中央部には挿入配置孔27aが形成されている。 The second member 21 is composed of a first planar portion 26 facing in the vertical direction and a second planar portion 27 facing in the horizontal direction, and has a left end portion and a second planar portion of the first planar portion 26. The lower end of 27 is continuous. A mounting hole 26a is formed in the central portion of the first planar portion 26. An insertion arrangement hole 27a is formed in the central portion of the second planar portion 27.
 第1の部材20における第2の面部23の下端部と第2の部材21における第1の面状部26の右端部とはネジ止め等によって結合され、第1の部材20における第1の面部22の左端部と第2の部材21における第2の面状部27の上端部とはネジ止め等によって結合されている。 The lower end of the second surface 23 of the first member 20 and the right end of the first surface 26 of the second member 21 are connected by screwing or the like, and the first surface of the first member 20 is connected. The left end portion of 22 and the upper end portion of the second planar portion 27 of the second member 21 are connected by screwing or the like.
 内フレーム17は外フレーム16の内側に配置され、第1の支持部材28と第2の支持部材29とが結合されて構成されている。 The inner frame 17 is arranged inside the outer frame 16, and is configured by connecting the first support member 28 and the second support member 29.
 第1の支持部材28は上下方向を向く天面部30と左右方向を向く右側面部31とから成り、天面部30の右端部と右側面部31の上端部とが連続されている。天面部30の中央部には挿入配置孔30aが形成されている。右側面部31の中央部には貫通孔31aが形成されている。 The first support member 28 is composed of a top surface portion 30 facing in the vertical direction and a right side surface portion 31 facing in the left-right direction, and the right end portion of the top surface portion 30 and the upper end portion of the right side surface portion 31 are continuous. An insertion arrangement hole 30a is formed in the central portion of the top surface portion 30. A through hole 31a is formed in the central portion of the right side surface portion 31.
 第2の支持部材29は上下方向を向く底面部32と左右方向を向く左側面部33とから成り、底面部32の左端部と左側面部33の下端部とが連続されている。底面部32の中央部には取付孔32aが形成されている。左側面部33の中央部には取付孔33aが形成されている。 The second support member 29 is composed of a bottom surface portion 32 facing in the vertical direction and a left side surface portion 33 facing in the left-right direction, and the left end portion of the bottom surface portion 32 and the lower end portion of the left side surface portion 33 are continuous. A mounting hole 32a is formed in the central portion of the bottom surface portion 32. A mounting hole 33a is formed in the central portion of the left side surface portion 33.
 第1の支持部材28における右側面部31の下端部と第2の支持部材29における底面部32の右端部とはネジ止め等によって結合され、第1の支持部材28における天面部30の左端部と第2の支持部材29における左側面部33の上端部とはネジ止め等によって結合されている。 The lower end of the right side surface 31 of the first support member 28 and the right end of the bottom surface 32 of the second support member 29 are connected by screwing or the like to the left end of the top surface 30 of the first support member 28. The second support member 29 is connected to the upper end of the left side surface 33 by screwing or the like.
 保持フレーム18は内フレーム17の内側に配置され、第1の取付部材34と第2の取付部材35とが結合されて構成されている。 The holding frame 18 is arranged inside the inner frame 17, and is configured by connecting the first mounting member 34 and the second mounting member 35.
 第1の取付部材34は上下方向を向く上面部36と左右方向を向く右横面部37とから成り、上面部36の右端部と右横面部37の上端部とが連続されている。右横面部37の中央部には挿入配置孔37aが形成されている。 The first mounting member 34 is composed of an upper surface portion 36 facing in the vertical direction and a right lateral surface portion 37 facing in the horizontal direction, and the right end portion of the upper surface portion 36 and the upper end portion of the right lateral surface portion 37 are continuous. An insertion arrangement hole 37a is formed in the central portion of the right lateral surface portion 37.
 第2の取付部材35は上下方向を向く下面部38と左右方向を向く左横面部39とから成り、下面部38の左端部と左横面部39の下端部とが連続されている。左横面部39の中央部には取付孔39aが形成されている。 The second mounting member 35 is composed of a lower surface portion 38 facing in the vertical direction and a left lateral surface portion 39 facing in the horizontal direction, and the left end portion of the lower surface portion 38 and the lower end portion of the left lateral surface portion 39 are continuous. A mounting hole 39a is formed in the central portion of the left lateral surface portion 39.
 第1の取付部材34における右横面部37の下端部と第2の取付部材35における下面部38の右端部とはネジ止め等によって結合され、第1の取付部材34における上面部36の左端部と第2の取付部材35における左横面部39の上端部とはネジ止め等によって結合されている。 The lower end of the right lateral surface portion 37 of the first mounting member 34 and the right end portion of the lower surface portion 38 of the second mounting member 35 are connected by screwing or the like, and the left end portion of the upper surface portion 36 of the first mounting member 34. And the upper end portion of the left lateral surface portion 39 of the second mounting member 35 are connected by screwing or the like.
 尚、上記には、外フレーム16と内フレーム17と保持フレーム18がそれぞれ二つの部材が結合されて構成される例を示したが、外フレーム16と内フレーム17と保持フレーム18は一つ又は三つ以上の部材によってそれぞれ枠状に形成されていてもよい。 In the above, an example in which the outer frame 16, the inner frame 17, and the holding frame 18 are formed by connecting two members to each other is shown, but the outer frame 16, the inner frame 17, and the holding frame 18 are one or more. Each of the three or more members may be formed in a frame shape.
 レンズユニット19は保持フレーム18の内側に配置され、鏡筒40と鏡筒40の内部において前後に並んで配置された複数のレンズ41、41、・・・と鏡筒40の後端部に取り付けられた撮像ユニット42とを有している。 The lens unit 19 is arranged inside the holding frame 18, and is attached to the rear end of the lens barrel 40 with a plurality of lenses 41, 41, ... Arranged side by side inside the lens barrel 40 and the lens barrel 40. It has a lens imaging unit 42.
 鏡筒40は前後に長い筒状に形成されている。撮像ユニット42はCCD(Charge Coupled Device)やCMOS(Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor)等の図示しない撮像素子を有している。 The lens barrel 40 is formed in a long tubular shape in the front-rear direction. The image pickup unit 42 has an image pickup device (not shown) such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or a CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor).
 鏡筒40の前面には最も前側に位置するレンズ41の外周側にカバー部材43が取り付けられている。カバー部材43は円環状に形成され、前面が前方へ凸の球面状に形成されている。 A cover member 43 is attached to the outer peripheral side of the lens 41 located on the frontmost side of the front surface of the lens barrel 40. The cover member 43 is formed in an annular shape, and the front surface is formed in a spherical shape that is convex forward.
 レンズユニット19の上方と側方にはそれぞれ駆動モーター44、44が配置されている(図4及び図5参照)。尚、レンズユニット19の上方に配置された駆動モーター44は第1の駆動モーター44Aとして設けられ、レンズユニット19の側方に配置された駆動モーター44は第2の駆動モーター44Bとして設けられている。第1の駆動モーター44Aと第2の駆動モーター44Bは配置される向きが異なるが構成は同じであり、以下の説明においては、場合に応じ、一方の駆動モーター44を第1の駆動モーター44Aとし、他方の駆動モーター44を第2の駆動モーター44Bとして示す。 Drive motors 44 and 44 are arranged above and to the side of the lens unit 19, respectively (see FIGS. 4 and 5). The drive motor 44 arranged above the lens unit 19 is provided as the first drive motor 44A, and the drive motor 44 arranged on the side of the lens unit 19 is provided as the second drive motor 44B. .. The first drive motor 44A and the second drive motor 44B are arranged in different directions but have the same configuration. In the following description, one drive motor 44 is referred to as the first drive motor 44A, depending on the case. The other drive motor 44 is shown as the second drive motor 44B.
 駆動モーター44は、例えば、扁平モーターであり、ベースヨーク45とマグネット46とコイル47、47、・・・と対向ヨーク48と軸受ホルダー49と軸受50と支軸51を有している(図6乃至図9参照)。尚、以下の駆動モーター44の構成は、第1の駆動モーター44Aの向きで説明する。 The drive motor 44 is, for example, a flat motor, and has a base yoke 45, a magnet 46, coils 47, 47, ..., An opposing yoke 48, a bearing holder 49, a bearing 50, and a support shaft 51 (FIG. 6). To FIG. 9). The following configuration of the drive motor 44 will be described with the orientation of the first drive motor 44A.
 ベースヨーク45は上下方向を向く平板の略円環状に形成されている。 The base yoke 45 is formed in a substantially annular shape of a flat plate facing in the vertical direction.
 マグネット46は円環状に形成され、ベースヨーク45の上面に取り付けられてコイル47、47、・・・の巻回部52、52、・・・に対向して位置され、周方向に並んでN極とS極の磁極46a、46a、・・・が交互に着磁されている。マグネット46は、例えば、45°の等間隔で8極に着磁されており、磁極46a、46a、・・・の境界が極境46b、46b、・・・として形成されている。 The magnet 46 is formed in an annular shape, is attached to the upper surface of the base yoke 45, is positioned so as to face the winding portions 52, 52, ... Of the coils 47, 47, ..., And is arranged in the circumferential direction. The poles and the poles 46a, 46a, ... Of the S pole are alternately magnetized. The magnet 46 is magnetized to eight poles at equal intervals of 45 °, for example, and the boundaries of the magnetic poles 46a, 46a, ... Are formed as polar boundaries 46b, 46b, ....
 コイル47は環状に形成された巻回部52と巻回部52から引き出された一対の接続部53、53とを有している(図7及び図10参照)。巻回部52は、緩やかな円弧状に形成された外周部52aと、外周部52aの内側に位置され緩やかな円弧状に形成された内周部52bと、外周部52aの両端部と内周部52bの両端部とをそれぞれ結ぶ直線状の推力発生部52c、52cとから成る。接続部53、53はコイル47の両端部に相当する部分であり、巻回部52から引き出された部分である。 The coil 47 has a winding portion 52 formed in an annular shape and a pair of connecting portions 53, 53 drawn from the winding portion 52 (see FIGS. 7 and 10). The winding portion 52 includes an outer peripheral portion 52a formed in a gentle arc shape, an inner peripheral portion 52b located inside the outer peripheral portion 52a and formed in a gentle arc shape, and both ends and inner circumferences of the outer peripheral portion 52a. It is composed of linear thrust generating portions 52c and 52c connecting both ends of the portion 52b, respectively. The connecting portions 53 and 53 are portions corresponding to both ends of the coil 47 and are portions drawn out from the winding portion 52.
 コイル47、47、・・・は基板54に取り付けられて配置されている(図6乃至図10参照)。基板54は、例えば、フレキシブルプリント配線板であり、円環状に形成されたコイル配置部55とコイル配置部55から導出され所定の方向に延びる導電部56とを有している。基板54の厚み方向における両面には図示しない回路パターンが形成されている。コイル配置部55は厚み方向における一方の面が第1の配置面57として形成され厚み方向における他方の面が第2の配置面58として形成されている。 The coils 47, 47, ... Are attached to and arranged on the substrate 54 (see FIGS. 6 to 10). The substrate 54 is, for example, a flexible printed wiring board, and has a coil arranging portion 55 formed in an annular shape and a conductive portion 56 derived from the coil arranging portion 55 and extending in a predetermined direction. A circuit pattern (not shown) is formed on both sides of the substrate 54 in the thickness direction. One surface of the coil arrangement portion 55 in the thickness direction is formed as the first arrangement surface 57, and the other surface in the thickness direction is formed as the second arrangement surface 58.
 上記したように基板54としてコイル47が配置されたコイル配置部55とコイル配置部55から導出され所定の方向に延びる導電部56とを有するフレキシブルプリント配線板が用いられている。 As described above, a flexible printed wiring board having a coil arranging portion 55 on which the coil 47 is arranged and a conductive portion 56 led out from the coil arranging portion 55 and extending in a predetermined direction is used as the substrate 54.
 従って、導電部56がコイル配置部55から導出された構成にされているため、導電部56を屈曲可能な状態で位置させることが可能になり、基板54の配置に関する自由度が高く、撮像装置1における設計の自由度の向上を図ることができる。 Therefore, since the conductive portion 56 is derived from the coil arranging portion 55, the conductive portion 56 can be positioned in a bendable state, the degree of freedom regarding the arrangement of the substrate 54 is high, and the image pickup apparatus. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design in 1.
 第1の配置面57にはコイル47、47、・・・の巻回部52、52、・・・が、例えば、60度の間隔で六つが配置され、周方向に等間隔に並んで位置されている(図6及び図7参照)。コイル47、47、・・・は、例えば、二つずつが接続され3相に形成されている。 Six winding portions 52, 52, ... Of the coils 47, 47, ... Are arranged on the first arrangement surface 57 at intervals of 60 degrees, and are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. (See FIGS. 6 and 7). For example, two coils 47, 47, ... Are connected to each other to form a three-phase structure.
 コイル47の接続部53、53はコイル配置部55の外周面55aの外側を通り折り返された状態にされ、先端部53a、53aが第2の配置面56において回路パターンの一端部として形成された接続端子部59に接続されている(図7、図10及び図11参照)。駆動モーター44においては、隣り合って位置された二つの巻回部52、52から引き出された各一方の接続部53、53の先端部53a、53aが隣り合う状態でそれぞれ接続端子部59、59に接続されている。 The connection portions 53, 53 of the coil 47 are folded back through the outside of the outer peripheral surface 55a of the coil arrangement portion 55, and the tip portions 53a, 53a are formed as one end of the circuit pattern on the second arrangement surface 56. It is connected to the connection terminal portion 59 (see FIGS. 7, 10 and 11). In the drive motor 44, the connection terminal portions 59 and 59 are adjacent to each other with the tip portions 53a and 53a of the respective connection portions 53 and 53 drawn out from the two winding portions 52 and 52 located adjacent to each other. It is connected to the.
 駆動モーター44においては、コイル47における接続部53の先端部53aが第2の配置面58において接続端子部59に接続されており、コイル配置部55の第1の配置面57側に接続部53の先端部53aが存在しないため、その分、基板54における第1の配置面57の巻回部52のための配置スペースを大きくすることが可能になる。 In the drive motor 44, the tip end portion 53a of the connection portion 53 of the coil 47 is connected to the connection terminal portion 59 on the second arrangement surface 58, and the connection portion 53 is connected to the first arrangement surface 57 side of the coil arrangement portion 55. Since the tip portion 53a of the first portion 53a does not exist, the arrangement space for the winding portion 52 of the first arrangement surface 57 on the substrate 54 can be increased accordingly.
 このように第1の配置面57の巻回部52のための配置スペースを大きくすることが可能にされているため、第1の配置面57には周方向において六つの巻回部52、52、・・・が等間隔に並んで配置されている(図7参照)。また、隣り合う巻回部52、52において並ぶ推力発生部52c、52cの間隔Hが小さくされている。従って、巻回部52の巻き数を大きくすることが可能になり、巻回部52への通電時に発生する駆動力が大きくされている。 Since it is possible to increase the arrangement space for the winding portion 52 of the first arrangement surface 57 in this way, the first arrangement surface 57 has six winding portions 52, 52 in the circumferential direction. , ... Are arranged side by side at equal intervals (see FIG. 7). Further, the distance H between the thrust generating portions 52c and 52c arranged in the adjacent winding portions 52 and 52 is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of turns of the winding portion 52, and the driving force generated when the winding portion 52 is energized is increased.
 基板54の第2の配置面58には磁気検出素子60、60、60が周方向に離隔して取り付けられて配置されている(図6及び図11参照)。磁気検出素子60、60、60はマグネット46のコイル47、47、・・・に対する回転方向における相対的な位置検出を行う機能を有し、例えば、60度の間隔で位置されている。磁気検出素子60は一つのコイル47の接続部53、53間に対応する位置に配置されている。 Magnetic detection elements 60, 60, 60 are arranged and arranged apart from each other in the circumferential direction on the second arrangement surface 58 of the substrate 54 (see FIGS. 6 and 11). The magnetic detection elements 60, 60, 60 have a function of detecting the position of the magnet 46 relative to the coils 47, 47, ... In the rotation direction, and are positioned at intervals of, for example, 60 degrees. The magnetic detection element 60 is arranged at a position corresponding to the connection portions 53, 53 of one coil 47.
 このように、磁気検出素子60は周方向において隣り合う接続部53、53の間に位置されており、接続部53と磁気検出素子60が径方向において並ぶ位置関係にならないため、磁気検出素子60の基板54に対する配置位置の自由度の向上を図ることができる。 As described above, the magnetic detection element 60 is located between the connecting portions 53 and 53 adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction, and the connection portion 53 and the magnetic detection element 60 are not arranged in a radial direction. Therefore, the magnetic detection element 60 It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the arrangement position with respect to the substrate 54.
 コイル配置部55の第2の配置面58にはコイル配置部55を補強するための環状の補強シート61が貼り付けられている。補強シート61の外周部には逃げ切欠61a、61a、・・・が周方向において等間隔に離隔して形成されている。補強シート61には逃げ孔61b、61b、61bが周方向において等間隔に離隔して形成されている。 An annular reinforcing sheet 61 for reinforcing the coil arranging portion 55 is attached to the second arranging surface 58 of the coil arranging portion 55. Relief cutouts 61a, 61a, ... Are formed on the outer peripheral portion of the reinforcing sheet 61 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Relief holes 61b, 61b, 61b are formed in the reinforcing sheet 61 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.
 補強シート61が第2の配置面58に貼り付けられた状態においては、逃げ切欠61a、61a、・・・にそれぞれコイル47の接続部53、53、・・・が位置され、逃げ孔61b、61b、61bにそれぞれ磁気検出素子60、60、60が位置される。従って、補強シート61によりコイル配置部55の補強が行われた上で、補強シート61と接続部53、53、・・・及び磁気検出素子60、60、60との干渉が回避されている。 In the state where the reinforcing sheet 61 is attached to the second arrangement surface 58, the connection portions 53, 53, ... Of the coil 47 are located in the escape cutouts 61a, 61a, ..., Respective holes 61b, respectively. Magnetic detection elements 60, 60, and 60 are located at 61b and 61b, respectively. Therefore, the coil arranging portion 55 is reinforced by the reinforcing sheet 61, and interference between the reinforcing sheet 61 and the connecting portions 53, 53, ... And the magnetic detection elements 60, 60, 60 is avoided.
 対向ヨーク48は上下方向を向く板状の環状に形成され、補強シート61に取り付けられている。対向ヨーク48の外周部には切欠部48a、48a、・・・が周方向において等間隔に離隔して形成されている。対向ヨーク48には配置孔48b、48b、48bが周方向において等間隔に離隔して形成されている。 The facing yoke 48 is formed in a plate-shaped annular shape facing in the vertical direction, and is attached to the reinforcing sheet 61. Notches 48a, 48a, ... Are formed on the outer peripheral portion of the facing yoke 48 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Arrangement holes 48b, 48b, 48b are formed in the facing yoke 48 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.
 対向ヨーク48は切欠部48a、48a、・・・と配置孔48b、48b、48bがそれぞれ逃げ切欠61a、61a、・・・と逃げ孔61b、61b、61bに重なる状態で補強シート61に取り付けられている。従って、対向ヨーク48と接続部53、53、・・・及び磁気検出素子60、60、60との干渉が回避されている。 The facing yoke 48 is attached to the reinforcing sheet 61 in a state where the notches 48a, 48a, ... And the arrangement holes 48b, 48b, 48b overlap the relief cutouts 61a, 61a, ... And the relief holes 61b, 61b, 61b, respectively. ing. Therefore, interference between the facing yoke 48 and the connecting portions 53, 53, ... And the magnetic detection elements 60, 60, 60 is avoided.
 対向ヨーク48には補強シート61の反対側から補助ヨーク62が取り付けられている。補助ヨーク62は平板の円環状に形成され、切欠部48a、48a、・・・と配置孔48b、48b、48bを覆う状態で対向ヨーク48に取り付けられている。 An auxiliary yoke 62 is attached to the facing yoke 48 from the opposite side of the reinforcing sheet 61. The auxiliary yoke 62 is formed in an annular shape of a flat plate, and is attached to the facing yoke 48 in a state of covering the notches 48a, 48a, ... And the arrangement holes 48b, 48b, 48b.
 上記のように駆動モーター44においては、マグネット46が取り付けられるベースヨーク45と磁気検出素子60が配置される配置孔48bが形成された対向ヨーク48とが設けられ、対向ヨーク48に取り付けられ配置孔48bを覆う補助ヨーク62が設けられている。 As described above, in the drive motor 44, a base yoke 45 to which the magnet 46 is attached and an opposing yoke 48 in which an arrangement hole 48b in which the magnetic detection element 60 is arranged are formed are provided, and the facing yoke 48 is attached to the arrangement hole 48. An auxiliary yoke 62 is provided to cover the 48b.
 従って、補助ヨーク62によって配置孔48bが覆われて閉磁路が形成されるため、磁気検出素子60の感度の向上を図ることができる。 Therefore, since the arrangement hole 48b is covered with the auxiliary yoke 62 to form a closed magnetic path, the sensitivity of the magnetic detection element 60 can be improved.
 軸受ホルダー49は上下方向が軸方向にされた筒状部49aと筒状部49aの下側の開口を閉塞する底面部49bと筒状部49aの上下方向における中間部から外方に張り出されたフランジ部49cとを有している(図6、図8及び図9参照)。軸受ホルダー49は筒状部49aの一部がベースヨーク45の中央部に挿入された状態でフランジ部49cがベースヨーク45の上面における内周部に取り付けられている。軸受ホルダー49における底面部49bの内面にはスラスト受け63が配置されている。 The bearing holder 49 projects outward from the middle portion in the vertical direction of the tubular portion 49a whose vertical direction is axial and the bottom surface portion 49b that closes the lower opening of the tubular portion 49a and the tubular portion 49a. It has a flange portion 49c (see FIGS. 6, 8 and 9). The bearing holder 49 has a flange portion 49c attached to the inner peripheral portion on the upper surface of the base yoke 45 in a state where a part of the tubular portion 49a is inserted into the central portion of the base yoke 45. A thrust receiver 63 is arranged on the inner surface of the bottom surface portion 49b of the bearing holder 49.
 軸受50は、例えば、焼結によって円筒状に形成されている。軸受50は軸受ホルダー49における筒状部49aの内部に挿入されている。 The bearing 50 is formed into a cylindrical shape by, for example, sintering. The bearing 50 is inserted inside the tubular portion 49a of the bearing holder 49.
 尚、焼結は成形型を用いることなく成形を行う方法であるため、高融点の材料や反応し易い材料でも所定の形状の部品を作ることが可能であり、軸受50を焼結によって形成することにより、軸受50の材料に関し選択の余地の向上を図ることができる。 Since sintering is a method of molding without using a molding die, it is possible to produce a part having a predetermined shape even with a material having a high melting point or a material that easily reacts, and the bearing 50 is formed by sintering. As a result, it is possible to improve the choice of the material of the bearing 50.
 上記のように、駆動モーター44においては、支軸51を回転可能に支持する軸受50が焼結により形成されているため、ベアリング(玉軸受)を用いることなく軸を支持する構造を構成することが可能になり、その分、軸受50の径を小さくすることが可能になり、駆動モーター44の小型化を図ることができる。 As described above, in the drive motor 44, since the bearing 50 that rotatably supports the support shaft 51 is formed by sintering, a structure that supports the shaft without using a bearing (ball bearing) is configured. This makes it possible to reduce the diameter of the bearing 50 by that amount, and the drive motor 44 can be downsized.
 支軸51は上下に延びる軸部51aと軸部51aの上端部から張り出されたフランジ状の被取付部51bと被取付部51bの上側に位置された頭部51cとから成る。支軸51は駆動モーター44における回転支点とされ、頭部51cが対向ヨーク48の中央部と補助ヨーク62の中央部とに挿入された状態で被取付部51bが対向ヨーク48の下面における内周部に取り付けられている。 The support shaft 51 is composed of a shaft portion 51a extending vertically, a flange-shaped attached portion 51b protruding from the upper end portion of the shaft portion 51a, and a head portion 51c located above the attached portion 51b. The support shaft 51 is used as a rotation fulcrum in the drive motor 44, and the mounted portion 51b is the inner circumference of the lower surface of the facing yoke 48 with the head portion 51c inserted into the central portion of the opposing yoke 48 and the central portion of the auxiliary yoke 62. It is attached to the part.
 支軸51は軸部51aが軸受50に上方から挿入され軸受50に回転可能に支持される。このとき軸部51aの先端面がスラスト受け63に接し、支軸51の軸方向における荷重がスラスト受け63によって受けられる。 The support shaft 51 has a shaft portion 51a inserted into the bearing 50 from above and rotatably supported by the bearing 50. At this time, the tip surface of the shaft portion 51a comes into contact with the thrust receiver 63, and the load in the axial direction of the support shaft 51 is received by the thrust receiver 63.
 上記のように構成された駆動モーター44において、コイル47と磁気検出素子60には基板54を介して図示しない電源回路から電流が供給される。 In the drive motor 44 configured as described above, current is supplied to the coil 47 and the magnetic detection element 60 from a power supply circuit (not shown) via the substrate 54.
 内フレーム17における底面部32には第1の副軸64が取付孔32aに挿入された状態で取り付けられている(図5参照)。第1の副軸64は上端部が取付孔32aに挿入され、上端部以外の部分が底面部32から下方へ突出されている。 The first auxiliary shaft 64 is attached to the bottom surface 32 of the inner frame 17 in a state of being inserted into the attachment hole 32a (see FIG. 5). The upper end of the first sub-shaft 64 is inserted into the mounting hole 32a, and the portion other than the upper end protrudes downward from the bottom surface 32.
 保持フレーム18における左横面部39には第2の副軸65が取付孔39aに挿入された状態で取り付けられている。第2の副軸65は右端部が取付孔39aに挿入され、右端部以外の部分が左横面部39から左方へ突出されている。 The second auxiliary shaft 65 is attached to the left lateral surface portion 39 of the holding frame 18 in a state of being inserted into the mounting hole 39a. The right end of the second auxiliary shaft 65 is inserted into the mounting hole 39a, and the portion other than the right end protrudes to the left from the left lateral surface portion 39.
 外フレーム16における第1の面状部26には第1の軸受体66が取付孔26a挿入された状態で取り付けられ、内フレーム17における左側面部33には第2の軸受体67が取付孔33aに挿入された状態で取り付けられている。 The first bearing body 66 is attached to the first planar portion 26 of the outer frame 16 with the mounting holes 26a inserted, and the second bearing body 67 is attached to the left side surface portion 33 of the inner frame 17 with the mounting holes 33a inserted. It is installed in the state of being inserted in.
 <各部間の取付構造>
 レンズユニット19の外周面には保持フレーム18がネジ止め等によって取り付けられる(図3及び図5参照)。レンズユニット19に保持フレーム18が取り付けられた状態においては、レンズユニット19の前後両端部がそれぞれ保持フレーム18の前後に突出される。
<Mounting structure between each part>
A holding frame 18 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the lens unit 19 by screwing or the like (see FIGS. 3 and 5). When the holding frame 18 is attached to the lens unit 19, both front and rear ends of the lens unit 19 are projected to the front and back of the holding frame 18, respectively.
 保持フレーム18における右横面部37の外面には第2の駆動モーター44Bのベースヨーク45がネジ止め等によって取り付けられ、第2の駆動モーター44Bがレンズユニット19の右方に配置される。 The base yoke 45 of the second drive motor 44B is attached to the outer surface of the right lateral surface portion 37 of the holding frame 18 by screwing or the like, and the second drive motor 44B is arranged on the right side of the lens unit 19.
 保持フレーム18の外周側には内フレーム17が配置される。保持フレーム18の外周側に内フレーム17が配置された状態においては、保持フレーム18の左横面部39に取り付けられた第2の副軸65が内フレーム17の左側面部33に取り付けられた第2の軸受体67に回転可能に支持される。 An inner frame 17 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the holding frame 18. In the state where the inner frame 17 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the holding frame 18, the second auxiliary shaft 65 attached to the left lateral surface portion 39 of the holding frame 18 is attached to the left side surface portion 33 of the inner frame 17. It is rotatably supported by the bearing body 67 of the above.
 第2の駆動モーター44Bは補助ヨーク62が内フレーム17における右側面部31の内面にネジ止め等によって取り付けられる。 The auxiliary yoke 62 of the second drive motor 44B is attached to the inner surface of the right side surface portion 31 of the inner frame 17 by screwing or the like.
 第2の駆動モーター44Bにおける軸受ホルダー49の一部は保持フレーム18の右横面部37に形成された挿入配置孔37aに挿入され、第2の駆動モーター44Bにおける支軸51の一部は内フレーム17の右側面部31に形成された貫通孔31aに挿入される。 A part of the bearing holder 49 in the second drive motor 44B is inserted into the insertion arrangement hole 37a formed in the right lateral surface portion 37 of the holding frame 18, and a part of the support shaft 51 in the second drive motor 44B is an inner frame. It is inserted into the through hole 31a formed in the right side surface portion 31 of 17.
 内フレーム17における天面部30の上面には第1の駆動モーター44Aのベースヨーク45がネジ止め等によって取り付けられ、第1の駆動モーター44Aがレンズユニット19及び保持フレーム18の上方に配置される。 The base yoke 45 of the first drive motor 44A is attached to the upper surface of the top surface portion 30 of the inner frame 17 by screwing or the like, and the first drive motor 44A is arranged above the lens unit 19 and the holding frame 18.
 内フレーム17の外周側には外フレーム16が配置される。内フレーム17の外周側に外フレーム16が配置された状態においては、内フレーム17の底面部32に取り付けられた第1の副軸64が外フレーム16の第1の面状部26に取り付けられた第1の軸受体66に回転可能に支持される。 The outer frame 16 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the inner frame 17. In the state where the outer frame 16 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the inner frame 17, the first auxiliary shaft 64 attached to the bottom surface portion 32 of the inner frame 17 is attached to the first planar portion 26 of the outer frame 16. It is rotatably supported by the first bearing body 66.
 第1の駆動モーター44Aは補助ヨーク62が外フレーム16における第1の面部22の下面にネジ止め等によって取り付けられる。 The auxiliary yoke 62 of the first drive motor 44A is attached to the lower surface of the first surface portion 22 of the outer frame 16 by screwing or the like.
 第1の駆動モーター44Aにおける軸受ホルダー49の一部は内フレーム17の天面部30に形成された挿入配置孔30aに挿入され、第1の駆動モーター44Aにおける支軸51の一部は外フレーム16の第1の面部22に形成された貫通孔22aに挿入される。 A part of the bearing holder 49 in the first drive motor 44A is inserted into the insertion arrangement hole 30a formed in the top surface portion 30 of the inner frame 17, and a part of the support shaft 51 in the first drive motor 44A is the outer frame 16. It is inserted into the through hole 22a formed in the first surface portion 22 of the above.
 上記のように構成された像ぶれ補正装置15においては、駆動モーター44の支軸51の中心軸と第1の副軸64の中心軸とを結ぶ軸が第1の支点軸68とされ、第2の駆動モーター44Bの支軸51の中心軸と第2の副軸65の中心軸とを結ぶ軸が第2の支点軸69とされる(図5参照)。 In the image blur correction device 15 configured as described above, the axis connecting the central axis of the support shaft 51 of the drive motor 44 and the central axis of the first sub-axis 64 is set as the first fulcrum axis 68, and the first fulcrum axis 68 is used. The axis connecting the central axis of the support shaft 51 of the drive motor 44B and the central axis of the second sub-axis 65 is referred to as the second fulcrum axis 69 (see FIG. 5).
 上記したように、第1の駆動モーター44Aは軸方向が上下方向にされた状態でベースヨーク45が内フレーム17に取り付けられ補助ヨーク62が外フレーム16に取り付けられる。従って、第1の駆動モーター44Aにおいて、コイル47に電流が供給され推力発生部52c、52cに推力が発生すると、マグネット46に支軸51を回転支点とした回転力が発生し、外フレーム16に対して内フレーム17が回動される。 As described above, in the first drive motor 44A, the base yoke 45 is attached to the inner frame 17 and the auxiliary yoke 62 is attached to the outer frame 16 in a state where the axial direction is up and down. Therefore, in the first drive motor 44A, when a current is supplied to the coil 47 and thrust is generated in the thrust generating portions 52c and 52c, a rotational force is generated in the magnet 46 with the support shaft 51 as the rotation fulcrum, and the outer frame 16 is generated. On the other hand, the inner frame 17 is rotated.
 また、第2の駆動モーター44Bは軸方向が左右方向にされた状態でベースヨーク45が保持フレーム18に取り付けられ、補助ヨーク62が内フレーム17に取り付けられる。従って、第2の駆動モーター44Bにおいて、コイル47に電流が供給され推力発生部52c、52cに推力が発生すると、マグネット46に支軸51を回転支点とした回転力が発生し、内フレーム17に対して保持フレーム18が回動される。 Further, in the second drive motor 44B, the base yoke 45 is attached to the holding frame 18 and the auxiliary yoke 62 is attached to the inner frame 17 in a state where the axial direction is in the left-right direction. Therefore, in the second drive motor 44B, when a current is supplied to the coil 47 and thrust is generated in the thrust generating portions 52c and 52c, a rotational force is generated in the magnet 46 with the support shaft 51 as the rotation fulcrum, and the inner frame 17 is generated. On the other hand, the holding frame 18 is rotated.
 <像ぶれ補正装置の動作>
 以下に、像ぶれ補正装置15におけるぶれ補正動作について説明する(図12乃至図14参照)。
<Operation of image blur correction device>
The blur correction operation in the image blur correction device 15 will be described below (see FIGS. 12 to 14).
 上記したように、第1の駆動モーター44Aにおいては、マグネット46がコイル47、47、・・・の巻回部52、52、・・・に対向して位置されている(図12参照)。従って、第1の駆動モーター44Aのコイル47に電流が供給され推力発生部52c、52cに推力が発生すると、マグネット46に支軸51の中心軸と第1の副軸64の中心軸とを結ぶ第1の支点軸68を支点とした回転力が生じる。 As described above, in the first drive motor 44A, the magnet 46 is positioned so as to face the winding portions 52, 52, ... Of the coils 47, 47, ... (See FIG. 12). Therefore, when a current is supplied to the coil 47 of the first drive motor 44A and thrust is generated in the thrust generating portions 52c and 52c, the central axis of the support shaft 51 and the central axis of the first auxiliary shaft 64 are connected to the magnet 46. A rotational force is generated with the first fulcrum shaft 68 as the fulcrum.
 また、第2の駆動モーター44Bにおいては、マグネット46がコイル47、47、・・・の巻回部52、52、・・・に対向して位置されている。従って、第2の駆動モーター44Bのコイル47に電流が供給され推力発生部52c、52cに推力が発生すると、マグネット46に支軸51の中心軸と第2の副軸65の中心軸とを結ぶ第2の支点軸69を支点とした回転力が生じる。 Further, in the second drive motor 44B, the magnet 46 is positioned so as to face the winding portions 52, 52, ... Of the coils 47, 47, .... Therefore, when a current is supplied to the coil 47 of the second drive motor 44B and thrust is generated in the thrust generating portions 52c and 52c, the central axis of the support shaft 51 and the central axis of the second auxiliary shaft 65 are connected to the magnet 46. A rotational force is generated with the second fulcrum shaft 69 as the fulcrum.
 このように、第1の駆動モーター44Aにおいてはマグネット46に第1の支点軸68を支点とした回転力が生じ、第2の駆動モーター44Bにおいてはマグネット46に第2の支点軸69を支点とした回転力が生じる。従って、レンズユニット19は、第1の支点軸68を支点として第1の駆動モーター44Aの駆動力(推力)によってヨーイング方向(第1の方向)へ回動され、第2の支点軸69を支点として第2の駆動モーター44Bの駆動力(推力)によってピッチング方向(第2の方向)へ回動される。 As described above, in the first drive motor 44A, a rotational force is generated on the magnet 46 with the first fulcrum shaft 68 as the fulcrum, and in the second drive motor 44B, the magnet 46 has the second fulcrum shaft 69 as the fulcrum. A rotational force is generated. Therefore, the lens unit 19 is rotated in the yawing direction (first direction) by the driving force (thrust) of the first drive motor 44A with the first fulcrum shaft 68 as the fulcrum, and the second fulcrum shaft 69 is the fulcrum. As a result, it is rotated in the pitching direction (second direction) by the driving force (thrust) of the second driving motor 44B.
 レンズユニット19のヨーイング方向への回動時には、第1の駆動モーター44Aの磁気検出素子60によるマグネット46の回転位置の検出が行われる。マグネット46の回転位置の検出は、マグネット46の回転に伴う磁束の変化が磁気検出素子60によって検出されることにより行われ、マグネット46の回転位置の検出結果に基づいてレンズユニット19のヨーイング方向における回動位置が検出される。第1の駆動モーター44Aの巻回部52、52、・・・にはマグネット46の回転位置の検出結果に応じて、上記したように、推力発生部52c、52c、・・・にぶれを補正する方向への推力が発生するように電流が供給される。 When the lens unit 19 rotates in the yawing direction, the rotation position of the magnet 46 is detected by the magnetic detection element 60 of the first drive motor 44A. The rotation position of the magnet 46 is detected by detecting the change in the magnetic flux accompanying the rotation of the magnet 46 by the magnetic detection element 60, and the yawing direction of the lens unit 19 is based on the detection result of the rotation position of the magnet 46. The rotation position is detected. In the winding portions 52, 52, ... Of the first drive motor 44A, as described above, the thrust generating portions 52c, 52c, ... Are corrected for blurring according to the detection result of the rotation position of the magnet 46. The current is supplied so that thrust is generated in the direction of the magnet.
 一方、レンズユニット19のピッチング方向への回動は、第2の駆動モーター44Bの推力発生部52c、52c、・・・にぶれを補正する方向への推力が発生するように巻回部52、52、・・・に電流が供給されることにより行われる。このときレンズユニット19は、ベースヨーク45、マグネット46及び支軸51の回転に伴って第2の支点軸69を支点として外フレーム16及び内フレーム17に対して保持フレーム18と一体になって回動される(図14参照)。 On the other hand, the rotation of the lens unit 19 in the pitching direction is such that the thrust generating portions 52c, 52c, ... Of the second drive motor 44B generate a thrust in the direction for correcting the blurring. This is done by supplying an electric current to 52, ... At this time, the lens unit 19 rotates integrally with the holding frame 18 with respect to the outer frame 16 and the inner frame 17 with the second fulcrum shaft 69 as the fulcrum as the base yoke 45, the magnet 46, and the support shaft 51 rotate. It is moved (see FIG. 14).
 レンズユニット19のピッチング方向への回動時には、第2の駆動モーター44Bの磁気検出素子60によるマグネット46の回転位置の検出が行われる。マグネット46の回転位置の検出は、マグネット46の回転に伴う磁束の変化が磁気検出素子60によって検出されることにより行われ、マグネット46の回転位置の検出結果に基づいてレンズユニット19のピッチング方向における回動位置が検出される。第2の駆動モーター44Bの巻回部52、52、・・・にはマグネット46の回転位置の検出結果に応じて、上記したように、推力発生部52c、52c、・・・にぶれを補正する方向への推力が発生するように電流が供給される。 When the lens unit 19 rotates in the pitching direction, the rotation position of the magnet 46 is detected by the magnetic detection element 60 of the second drive motor 44B. The rotation position of the magnet 46 is detected by detecting the change in the magnetic flux accompanying the rotation of the magnet 46 by the magnetic detection element 60, and the rotation position of the magnet 46 is detected in the pitching direction of the lens unit 19 based on the detection result. The rotation position is detected. In the winding portions 52, 52, ... Of the second drive motor 44B, as described above, the thrust generating portions 52c, 52c, ... Are corrected for blurring according to the detection result of the rotation position of the magnet 46. The current is supplied so that thrust is generated in the direction of the magnet.
 尚、上記には、内フレーム17に第2の支点軸69を支点としてレンズユニット19が回動可能に支持され、外フレーム16に第1の支点軸68を支点としてレンズユニット19と内フレーム17が一体になって回動可能に支持された例を示した。 In the above, the lens unit 19 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 17 with the second fulcrum shaft 69 as the fulcrum, and the lens unit 19 and the inner frame 17 with the first fulcrum shaft 68 as the fulcrum on the outer frame 16. An example was shown in which the lenses were integrally supported so as to be rotatably supported.
 しかしながら、像ぶれ補正装置15にあっては、逆に、内フレーム17に第1の支点軸68を支点としてレンズユニット19が回動可能に支持され、外フレーム16に第2の支点軸69を支点としてレンズユニット19と内フレーム17が一体になって回動可能に支持されていてもよい。 However, in the image blur correction device 15, conversely, the lens unit 19 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 17 with the first fulcrum shaft 68 as the fulcrum, and the second fulcrum shaft 69 is provided on the outer frame 16. As a fulcrum, the lens unit 19 and the inner frame 17 may be integrally supported so as to be rotatable.
 また、駆動モーター44においては、コイル47が3相の構成にされており、基板54におけるコイル配置部55に三つの磁気検出素子60、60、60が周方向に並んで位置されており、磁気検出素子60、60、60による検出状態に応じて各相を構成するコイル47、47毎に通電状態を切り換えてぶれ補正装置15において異なる駆動状態を設定することが可能である。 Further, in the drive motor 44, the coil 47 has a three-phase configuration, and three magnetic detection elements 60, 60, 60 are arranged side by side in the circumferential direction on the coil arrangement portion 55 on the substrate 54, and the magnetism It is possible to set different drive states in the blur correction device 15 by switching the energization state for each of the coils 47, 47 constituting each phase according to the detection state by the detection elements 60, 60, 60.
 <マグネットの変形例>
 次に、マグネットの変形例について説明する(図15乃至図17参照)。
<Modification example of magnet>
Next, a modified example of the magnet will be described (see FIGS. 15 to 17).
 以下に示す変形例に係るマグネット44Xは、上記したマグネット44と比較して、コイルと磁気検出素子の数が異なること及び軸受に関する構造が異なることのみが相違するため、マグネット44と比較して異なる部分についてのみ詳細に説明をし、その他の部分についてはマグネット44における同様の部分に付した符号と同じ符号を付して説明は省略する。 The magnet 44X according to the modification shown below is different from the magnet 44 because it differs from the magnet 44 only in that the number of coils and magnetic detection elements is different and the structure related to the bearing is different. Only the part will be described in detail, and the other parts will be given the same reference numerals as those given to the same parts in the magnet 44, and the description thereof will be omitted.
 尚、マグネット44Xは各部がマグネット44の対応する各部に対して異なる形状にされているものがあるが、コイルと磁気検出素子の数が異なること及び軸受に関する構造が異なることを除いては構造がマグネット44と同様であるため、マグネット44Xのマグネット44との形状の相違については説明を省略する。 Some magnets 44X have different shapes with respect to the corresponding parts of the magnet 44, but the structure is different except that the number of coils and magnetic detection elements is different and the structure related to the bearing is different. Since it is the same as the magnet 44, the description of the difference in shape between the magnet 44X and the magnet 44 will be omitted.
 駆動モーター44Xは、例えば、扁平モーターであり、ベースヨーク45とマグネット46とコイル47X、47X、・・・と対向ヨーク48と軸受ホルダー49Xと軸受50Xと支軸51Xを有している。尚、以下の駆動モーター44Xの構成は、第1の駆動モーター44Aと同様の向きで説明する。 The drive motor 44X is, for example, a flat motor, and has a base yoke 45, a magnet 46, coils 47X, 47X, ..., Opposing yoke 48, a bearing holder 49X, a bearing 50X, and a support shaft 51X. The configuration of the drive motor 44X below will be described in the same direction as that of the first drive motor 44A.
 コイル47Xは巻回部52Xと一対の接続部53、53とを有している。巻回部52Xは、巻回部52に対して周方向において長い形状に形成されている。コイル47Xはコイル47より数が少なくされ、例えば、90°の間隔で四つが設けられ、周方向に等間隔に並んで位置されている。コイル47X、47X、・・・は、例えば、1相に形成されている。 The coil 47X has a winding portion 52X and a pair of connecting portions 53 and 53. The winding portion 52X is formed in a shape longer in the circumferential direction with respect to the winding portion 52. The number of coils 47X is smaller than that of the coils 47. For example, four coils 47X are provided at intervals of 90 ° and are arranged side by side at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The coils 47X, 47X, ... Are formed in, for example, one phase.
 コイル47Xの接続部53、53はコイル47と同様にコイル配置部55の外周面55aの外側を通り折り返された状態にされ、先端部53a、53aが第2の配置面56において回路パターンの一端部に形成された接続端子部59、59にそれぞれ接続されている。尚、駆動モーター44Xにおいては、基板54の第1の配置面57に配置されるコイル47Xの数が駆動モーター44より少なくされており、第1の配置面57においてコイル47X以外の配置スペースが多くなるため、第1の配置面57に接続端子部59が形成され、コイル47Xにおける接続部53の先端部53aが第1の配置面57において接続端子部59に接続される構成にされていてもよい。 Similar to the coil 47, the connection portions 53 and 53 of the coil 47X are folded back through the outside of the outer peripheral surface 55a of the coil arrangement portion 55, and the tip portions 53a and 53a are at one end of the circuit pattern on the second arrangement surface 56. It is connected to the connection terminal portions 59 and 59 formed in the portions, respectively. In the drive motor 44X, the number of coils 47X arranged on the first arrangement surface 57 of the substrate 54 is smaller than that of the drive motor 44, and there are many arrangement spaces other than the coils 47X on the first arrangement surface 57. Therefore, even if the connection terminal portion 59 is formed on the first arrangement surface 57 and the tip end portion 53a of the connection portion 53 in the coil 47X is connected to the connection terminal portion 59 on the first arrangement surface 57. Good.
 基板54の第2の配置面58には磁気検出素子60が取り付けられて配置されている。磁気検出素子60はマグネット46のコイル47X、47X、・・・に対する回転方向における相対的な位置検出を行う機能を有している。 A magnetic detection element 60 is attached and arranged on the second arrangement surface 58 of the substrate 54. The magnetic detection element 60 has a function of detecting the position of the magnet 46 relative to the coils 47X, 47X, ... In the rotation direction.
 軸受ホルダー49Xは上下方向が軸方向にされた筒状部49dと筒状部49dの上側の開口を閉塞する天面部49eと筒状部49dの上下方向における中間部から外方に張り出されたフランジ部49fとを有している。軸受ホルダー49Xは筒状部49dの一部が対向ヨーク48の中央部に挿入された状態でフランジ部49fが対向ヨーク48の下面における内周部に取り付けられている。 The bearing holder 49X is projected outward from the middle portion in the vertical direction of the top surface portion 49e and the tubular portion 49d that close the upper openings of the tubular portion 49d and the tubular portion 49d whose vertical direction is axial. It has a flange portion 49f. The bearing holder 49X has a flange portion 49f attached to an inner peripheral portion on the lower surface of the facing yoke 48 in a state where a part of the tubular portion 49d is inserted into the central portion of the facing yoke 48.
 軸受50Xは、例えば、外輪50a、50aと内輪50b、50bとベアリング球50c、50c、・・・を有する玉軸受であり、外輪50a、50aが上下に離隔した状態で軸受ホルダー49Xの筒状部49aに固定され、内輪50b、50bが上下に離隔した状態で軸部材70の支軸51Xに固定されている。外輪50a、50aと内輪50b、50bの間にはスペーサー50dが配置されている。 The bearing 50X is, for example, a ball bearing having outer rings 50a, 50a, inner rings 50b, 50b, bearing balls 50c, 50c, ..., And a tubular portion of the bearing holder 49X with the outer rings 50a, 50a separated vertically. It is fixed to 49a, and the inner rings 50b and 50b are fixed to the support shaft 51X of the shaft member 70 in a state of being separated from each other in the vertical direction. Spacers 50d are arranged between the outer rings 50a and 50a and the inner rings 50b and 50b.
 支軸51Xは、例えば、軸部材70の一部として設けられ、駆動モーター44Xにおける回転支点とされている。軸部材70は上下方向が軸方向にされた円筒部71と円筒部71の下側の開口を閉塞する略平板状の軸形成部72と円筒部71の上端部から外方に張り出された張出部73と軸形成部72の中央部から上方に突出された支軸51Xとを有している。 The support shaft 51X is provided as a part of the shaft member 70, for example, and is used as a rotation fulcrum in the drive motor 44X. The shaft member 70 is projected outward from the cylindrical portion 71 whose vertical direction is axial and the upper end portion of the substantially flat shaft forming portion 72 and the cylindrical portion 71 that close the lower opening of the cylindrical portion 71. It has an overhanging portion 73 and a support shaft 51X protruding upward from the central portion of the shaft forming portion 72.
 軸部材70は円筒部71がベースヨーク45の中央部に上方から挿入され、支軸51Xが軸受ホルダー49Xの筒状部49aに下方から挿入された状態で張出部73がベースヨーク45の上面における内周部に取り付けられている。軸部材70は軸受50Xを介して軸受ホルダー49Xに回転可能に支持されている。 In the shaft member 70, the overhanging portion 73 is the upper surface of the base yoke 45 with the cylindrical portion 71 inserted into the central portion of the base yoke 45 from above and the support shaft 51X inserted into the tubular portion 49a of the bearing holder 49X from below. It is attached to the inner circumference of. The shaft member 70 is rotatably supported by the bearing holder 49X via the bearing 50X.
 上記のように構成された駆動モーター44Xにおいて、コイル47Xと磁気検出素子60には基板54を介して図示しない電源回路から電流が供給される。 In the drive motor 44X configured as described above, a current is supplied to the coil 47X and the magnetic detection element 60 from a power supply circuit (not shown) via the substrate 54.
 <撮像装置の一実施形態>
 図18に、本技術撮像装置の一実施形態によるビデオカメラのブロック図を示す。
<One Embodiment of the Imaging Device>
FIG. 18 shows a block diagram of a video camera according to an embodiment of the imaging device of the present technology.
 撮像装置(ビデオカメラ)100(撮像装置1に相当)は、撮像機能を担うレンズユニット101(レンズユニット19に相当)と、撮影された画像信号のアナログ-デジタル変換等の信号処理を行うカメラ信号処理部102と、画像信号の記録再生処理を行う画像処理部103とを有している。 The image pickup device (video camera) 100 (corresponding to the image pickup device 1) includes a lens unit 101 (corresponding to the lens unit 19) responsible for the image pickup function and a camera signal that performs signal processing such as analog-digital conversion of the captured image signal. It has a processing unit 102 and an image processing unit 103 that performs recording / reproduction processing of an image signal.
 また、撮像装置100は、撮影された画像等を表示する液晶パネル等の画像表示部104(表示部13に相当)と、メモリー1000(メモリーカード9及び内部メモリーに相当)への画像信号の書込及び読出を行うR/W(リーダ/ライタ)105と、撮像装置100の全体を制御するCPU(Central Processing Unit)106と、ユーザーによって所要の操作が行われる各種のスイッチ等から成る入力部107(操作スイッチ7、操作釦8、操作釦10、操作部17に相当)と、レンズユニット101に配置されたレンズの駆動を制御するレンズ駆動制御部108とを備えている。 Further, the image pickup apparatus 100 writes an image signal to an image display unit 104 (corresponding to the display unit 13) of a liquid crystal panel or the like for displaying a captured image or the like and a memory 1000 (corresponding to a memory card 9 and an internal memory). An input unit 107 consisting of an R / W (reader / writer) 105 for reading and reading, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 106 for controlling the entire image pickup device 100, and various switches for performing required operations by the user. It includes (corresponding to an operation switch 7, an operation button 8, an operation button 10, and an operation unit 17) and a lens drive control unit 108 that controls the drive of a lens arranged in the lens unit 101.
 レンズユニット101は、レンズ群109(レンズ41に相当)を含む光学系や、CCD(Charge Coupled Device)やCMOS(Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor)等の撮像素子110(撮像ユニット42に設けられた撮像素子に相当)等とによって構成されている。 The lens unit 101 includes an optical system including a lens group 109 (corresponding to a lens 41) and an image sensor 110 (an image sensor provided in the image sensor 42) such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or a CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor). Equivalent to) etc.
 カメラ信号処理部102は、撮像素子110からの出力信号に対するデジタル信号への変換、ノイズ除去、画質補正、輝度・色差信号への変換等の各種の信号処理を行う。 The camera signal processing unit 102 performs various signal processing such as conversion of the output signal from the image pickup element 110 into a digital signal, noise removal, image quality correction, and conversion into a luminance / color difference signal.
 画像処理部103は、所定の画像データーフォーマットに基づく画像信号の圧縮符号化・伸張復号化処理や解像度等のデーター仕様の変換処理等を行う。 The image processing unit 103 performs compression coding / decompression decoding processing of an image signal based on a predetermined image data format, conversion processing of data specifications such as resolution, and the like.
 画像表示部104はユーザーの入力部107に対する操作状態や撮影した画像等の各種のデーターを表示する機能を有している。 The image display unit 104 has a function of displaying various data such as an operation state of the user's input unit 107 and a captured image.
 R/W105は、画像処理部103によって符号化された画像データーのメモリー1000への書込及びメモリー1000に記録された画像データーの読出を行う。 The R / W 105 writes the image data encoded by the image processing unit 103 to the memory 1000 and reads the image data recorded in the memory 1000.
 CPU106は、撮像装置100に設けられた各回路ブロックを制御する制御処理部として機能し、入力部107からの指示入力信号等に基づいて各回路ブロックを制御する。 The CPU 106 functions as a control processing unit that controls each circuit block provided in the image pickup apparatus 100, and controls each circuit block based on an instruction input signal or the like from the input unit 107.
 入力部107は、例えば、シャッター操作を行うためのシャッターレリーズボタンや、動作モードを選択するための選択スイッチ等によって構成され、ユーザーによる操作に応じた指示入力信号をCPU106に対して出力する。 The input unit 107 is composed of, for example, a shutter release button for performing a shutter operation, a selection switch for selecting an operation mode, and the like, and outputs an instruction input signal according to the operation by the user to the CPU 106.
 レンズ駆動制御部108は、CPU106からの制御信号に基づいてレンズ群109の各レンズを駆動する図示しないモータ等を制御する。 The lens drive control unit 108 controls a motor or the like (not shown) that drives each lens of the lens group 109 based on a control signal from the CPU 106.
 メモリー1000は、例えば、R/W105に接続されたスロットに対して着脱可能な半導体メモリー(メモリーカード)や撮像装置100の内部に配置されている内部メモリーである。 The memory 1000 is, for example, a semiconductor memory (memory card) that can be attached to and detached from a slot connected to the R / W 105, or an internal memory that is arranged inside the image pickup apparatus 100.
 以下に、撮像装置100における動作を説明する。 The operation of the image pickup apparatus 100 will be described below.
 撮影の待機状態では、CPU106による制御の下で、レンズユニット101において撮影された画像信号が、カメラ信号処理部102を介して画像表示部104に出力され、カメラスルー画像として表示される。また、入力部107からのズーミングのための指示入力信号が入力されると、CPU106がレンズ駆動制御部108に制御信号を出力し、レンズ駆動制御部108の制御に基づいてレンズ群109の所定のレンズが移動される。 In the shooting standby state, the image signal shot by the lens unit 101 is output to the image display unit 104 via the camera signal processing unit 102 under the control of the CPU 106, and is displayed as a camera-through image. Further, when an instruction input signal for zooming is input from the input unit 107, the CPU 106 outputs a control signal to the lens drive control unit 108, and a predetermined lens group 109 is determined based on the control of the lens drive control unit 108. The lens is moved.
 入力部107からの指示入力信号によりレンズユニット101の図示しないシャッターが動作されると、撮影された画像信号がカメラ信号処理部102から画像処理部103に出力されて圧縮符号化処理され、所定のデーターフォーマットのデジタルデーターに変換される。変換されたデーターはR/W105に出力され、メモリー1000に書き込まれる。 When a shutter (not shown) of the lens unit 101 is operated by the instruction input signal from the input unit 107, the captured image signal is output from the camera signal processing unit 102 to the image processing unit 103 for compression coding processing, and a predetermined image signal is processed. Converted to digital data in data format. The converted data is output to R / W 105 and written to memory 1000.
 フォーカシングやズーミングは、CPU106からの制御信号に基づいてレンズ駆動制御部108がレンズ群109の所定のレンズを移動させることにより行われる。 Focusing and zooming are performed by the lens drive control unit 108 moving a predetermined lens of the lens group 109 based on a control signal from the CPU 106.
 メモリー1000に記録された画像データーを再生する場合には、入力部107に対する操作に応じて、R/W105によってメモリー1000から所定の画像データーが読み出され、画像処理部103によって伸張復号化処理が行われた後に、再生画像信号が画像表示部104に出力されて再生画像が表示される。 When reproducing the image data recorded in the memory 1000, the R / W 105 reads out the predetermined image data from the memory 1000 in response to the operation on the input unit 107, and the image processing unit 103 performs the decompression / decoding process. After that, the reproduced image signal is output to the image display unit 104 and the reproduced image is displayed.
 尚、本技術において、「撮像」とは、撮像素子110による取り込まれた光を電気信号に変換する光電変換処理から、カメラ信号処理部102による撮像素子110からの出力信号に対するデジタル信号への変換、ノイズ除去、画質補正、輝度・色差信号への変換等の処理、画像処理部103による所定の画像データフォーマットに基づく画像信号の圧縮符号化・伸張復号化処理や解像度等のデータ仕様の変換処理、R/W105によるメモリー1000への画像信号の書込処理までの一連の処理の一部のみ、または全てを含む処理のことを言う。 In the present technology, "imaging" means conversion from photoelectric conversion processing for converting light captured by the imaging element 110 into an electric signal to digital signal for an output signal from the imaging element 110 by the camera signal processing unit 102. , Noise removal, image quality correction, conversion to brightness / color difference signals, etc., compression coding / decompression decoding processing of image signals based on a predetermined image data format by the image processing unit 103, conversion processing of data specifications such as resolution, etc. , Refers to a process including only a part or all of a series of processes up to the process of writing an image signal to the memory 1000 by the R / W 105.
 即ち、「撮像」とは、撮像素子110による取り込まれた光を電気信号に変換する光電変換処理のみを指してもよく、撮像素子110による取り込まれた光を電気信号に変換する光電変換処理からカメラ信号処理部102による撮像素子110からの出力信号に対するデジタル信号への変換、ノイズ除去、画質補正、輝度・色差信号への変換等の処理までを指してもよく、撮像素子110による取り込まれた光を電気信号に変換する光電変換処理からカメラ信号処理部102による撮像素子110からの出力信号に対するデジタル信号への変換、ノイズ除去、画質補正、輝度・色差信号への変換等の処理を経て、画像処理部103による所定の画像データフォーマットに基づく画像信号の圧縮符号化・伸張復号化処理や解像度等のデータ仕様の変換処理までを指してもよく、撮像素子110による取り込まれた光を電気信号に変換する光電変換処理からカメラ信号処理部102による撮像素子110からの出力信号に対するデジタル信号への変換、ノイズ除去、画質補正、輝度・色差信号への変換等の処理、及び画像処理部103による所定の画像データフォーマットに基づく画像信号の圧縮符号化・伸張復号化処理や解像度等のデータ仕様の変換処理を経て指してもよく、R/W105によるメモリー1000への画像信号の書込処理までを指してもよい。 上記の処理において各処理の順番は適宜入れ替わってもよい。 That is, "imaging" may refer only to the photoelectric conversion process for converting the light captured by the imaging element 110 into an electric signal, and from the photoelectric conversion process for converting the light captured by the imaging element 110 into an electric signal. It may also refer to processing such as conversion of the output signal from the image pickup element 110 by the camera signal processing unit 102 into a digital signal, noise removal, image quality correction, and conversion into a brightness / color difference signal, and is captured by the image pickup element 110. After the photoelectric conversion process for converting light into an electric signal, the camera signal processing unit 102 converts the output signal from the image pickup element 110 into a digital signal, noise removal, image quality correction, conversion into a brightness / color difference signal, and the like. It may also refer to compression coding / decompression decoding processing of an image signal based on a predetermined image data format by the image processing unit 103 and conversion processing of data specifications such as resolution, and the light captured by the image pickup element 110 is an electric signal. The photoelectric conversion process to convert to digital signal by the camera signal processing unit 102 to a digital signal for the output signal from the image pickup element 110, noise removal, image quality correction, conversion to a brightness / color difference signal, etc., and the image processing unit 103. It may be pointed out through compression coding / decompression decoding processing of an image signal based on a predetermined image data format and conversion processing of data specifications such as resolution, up to writing processing of an image signal to the memory 1000 by R / W 105. You may point. In the above processing, the order of each processing may be changed as appropriate.
 また、本技術において、撮影装置100は、上記の処理を行う撮像素子110、カメラ信号処理部102、画像処理部103、R/W105の一部のみまたは全てを含むように構成されていてもよい。 Further, in the present technology, the photographing apparatus 100 may be configured to include only a part or all of the image pickup element 110, the camera signal processing unit 102, the image processing unit 103, and the R / W 105 that perform the above processing. ..
 <まとめ>
 以上に記載した通り、駆動モーター44、44X、ぶれ補正装置15及び撮像装置1にあっては、基板54におけるコイル配置部55の厚み方向における両面がそれぞれ第1の配置面57と第2の配置面58として形成され、複数のコイル47の巻回部52が第1の配置面57に配置され、磁気検出素子60が第2の配置面58に配置されている。
<Summary>
As described above, in the drive motors 44, 44X, the blur correction device 15, and the image pickup device 1, both sides of the coil arrangement portion 55 on the substrate 54 in the thickness direction are the first arrangement surface 57 and the second arrangement, respectively. Formed as a surface 58, the winding portions 52 of the plurality of coils 47 are arranged on the first arrangement surface 57, and the magnetic detection element 60 is arranged on the second arrangement surface 58.
 従って、基板54の厚み方向における両面である第1の配置面57と第2の配置面58にそれぞれ複数の巻回部52と磁気検出素子60が配置され、第1の配置面57に磁気検出素子60を配置するためのスペースが不要になる。これにより、第1の配置面57に配置する巻回部52の数や巻回部52の巻き数を増やすことが可能になるため、磁気検出素子60による適正な検出状態を確保した上で駆動モーター44、44Xの駆動力(推力)の向上を図ることができる。 Therefore, a plurality of winding portions 52 and magnetic detection elements 60 are arranged on the first arrangement surface 57 and the second arrangement surface 58, which are both sides in the thickness direction of the substrate 54, respectively, and magnetic detection is performed on the first arrangement surface 57. Space for arranging the element 60 is not required. This makes it possible to increase the number of winding portions 52 and the number of windings of the winding portion 52 arranged on the first arrangement surface 57, so that the magnetic detection element 60 ensures an appropriate detection state before driving. The driving force (thrust) of the motors 44 and 44X can be improved.
 また、基板54にコイル47の両端部が接続される接続端子部59が形成され、コイル47における接続部53の先端部53aが第2の配置面58において接続端子部59に接続されている。 Further, a connection terminal portion 59 is formed on the substrate 54 to which both ends of the coil 47 are connected, and the tip end portion 53a of the connection portion 53 in the coil 47 is connected to the connection terminal portion 59 on the second arrangement surface 58.
 従って、コイル配置部55の第1の配置面57側に接続部53の先端部53aが存在しないため、その分、基板54における第1の配置面57の配置スペースを大きくすることが可能になり、巻回部52の数を一層増やしたり巻回部52の巻き数を一層増やすことにより駆動モーター44、44Xの推力効率の向上を図ることができる。 Therefore, since the tip end portion 53a of the connection portion 53 does not exist on the first arrangement surface 57 side of the coil arrangement portion 55, it is possible to increase the arrangement space of the first arrangement surface 57 on the substrate 54 by that amount. The thrust efficiency of the drive motors 44 and 44X can be improved by further increasing the number of winding portions 52 and further increasing the number of windings of the winding portion 52.
 さらに、コイル47の接続部53がコイル配置部55の外周面55aの外側を通り折り返された状態にされている。 Further, the connecting portion 53 of the coil 47 passes through the outside of the outer peripheral surface 55a of the coil arranging portion 55 and is folded back.
 従って、接続部53がコイル配置部55の外周面55aの外側を通って接続端子部59に接続されるため、基板54に接続部53を挿通する挿通孔を形成する必要がなく、基板54の回路パターンの形成領域を大きくすることが可能になると共に簡素な構造によって接続部53を接続端子部59に接続することができる。 Therefore, since the connecting portion 53 is connected to the connecting terminal portion 59 through the outside of the outer peripheral surface 55a of the coil arranging portion 55, it is not necessary to form an insertion hole for inserting the connecting portion 53 in the substrate 54, and the substrate 54 The formation region of the circuit pattern can be increased, and the connection portion 53 can be connected to the connection terminal portion 59 by a simple structure.
 <その他>
 上記には、焼結によって形成された軸受50が用いられた駆動モーター44の例を示したが、駆動モーター44において、例えば、玉軸受が用いられて支軸を支持する構成にされてもよい。
<Others>
Although the example of the drive motor 44 in which the bearing 50 formed by sintering is used is shown above, in the drive motor 44, for example, a ball bearing may be used to support the support shaft. ..
 一方、上記には、玉軸受が用いられて支軸51Xを支持する構成にされた駆動モーター44Xの例を示したが、駆動モーター44Xにおいて、例えば、焼結によって形成された軸受が用いられる構成にされてもよい。 On the other hand, in the above, an example of the drive motor 44X in which a ball bearing is used to support the support shaft 51X has been shown, but in the drive motor 44X, for example, a bearing formed by sintering is used. May be made.
 また、上記には、コイル47の構成が3相にされた駆動モーター44と1相にされた駆動モーター44Xの例を示したが、駆動モーター44と駆動モーター44Xにおいてコイル47の相状態は1相又は3相に限られることはない。 Further, although the example of the drive motor 44 having the configuration of the coil 47 having three phases and the drive motor 44X having the configuration of one phase is shown above, the phase state of the coil 47 is 1 in the drive motor 44 and the drive motor 44X. It is not limited to phase or three phases.
 <応用例1>
 本開示に係る技術は、様々な製品へ応用することができる。例えば、本開示に係る技術は、自動車、電気自動車、ハイブリッド電気自動車、自動二輪車、自転車、パーソナルモビリティ、飛行機、ドローン、船舶、ロボット、建設機械、農業機械(トラクター)などのいずれかの種類の移動体に搭載される装置として実現されてもよい。特に、駆動モーター44、44Xは、例えば、自動車等の車両に設けられる開閉式のミラー等の駆動部として用いられてもよい。
<Application example 1>
The technology according to the present disclosure can be applied to various products. For example, the technology according to the present disclosure includes any type of movement such as automobiles, electric vehicles, hybrid electric vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles, personal mobility, airplanes, drones, ships, robots, construction machines, agricultural machines (tractors), and the like. It may be realized as a device mounted on the body. In particular, the drive motors 44 and 44X may be used as, for example, a drive unit such as an openable mirror provided in a vehicle such as an automobile.
 図19は、本開示に係る技術が適用され得る移動体制御システムの一例である車両制御システム7000の概略的な構成例を示すブロック図である。車両制御システム7000は、通信ネットワーク7010を介して接続された複数の電子制御ユニットを備える。図19に示した例では、車両制御システム7000は、駆動系制御ユニット7100、ボディ系制御ユニット7200、バッテリ制御ユニット7300、車外情報検出ユニット7400、車内情報検出ユニット7500、及び統合制御ユニット7600を備える。これらの複数の制御ユニットを接続する通信ネットワーク7010は、例えば、CAN(Controller Area Network)、LIN(Local Interconnect Network)、LAN(Local Area Network)又はFlexRay(登録商標)等の任意の規格に準拠した車載通信ネットワークであってよい。 FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration example of a vehicle control system 7000, which is an example of a mobile control system to which the technique according to the present disclosure can be applied. The vehicle control system 7000 includes a plurality of electronic control units connected via the communication network 7010. In the example shown in FIG. 19, the vehicle control system 7000 includes a drive system control unit 7100, a body system control unit 7200, a battery control unit 7300, an external information detection unit 7400, an in-vehicle information detection unit 7500, and an integrated control unit 7600. .. The communication network 7010 connecting these plurality of control units conforms to any standard such as CAN (Controller Area Network), LIN (Local Interconnect Network), LAN (Local Area Network) or FlexRay (registered trademark). It may be an in-vehicle communication network.
 各制御ユニットは、各種プログラムにしたがって演算処理を行うマイクロコンピュータと、マイクロコンピュータにより実行されるプログラム又は各種演算に用いられるパラメータ等を記憶する記憶部と、各種制御対象の装置を駆動する駆動回路とを備える。各制御ユニットは、通信ネットワーク7010を介して他の制御ユニットとの間で通信を行うためのネットワークI/Fを備えるとともに、車内外の装置又はセンサ等との間で、有線通信又は無線通信により通信を行うための通信I/Fを備える。図19では、統合制御ユニット7600の機能構成として、マイクロコンピュータ7610、汎用通信I/F7620、専用通信I/F7630、測位部7640、ビーコン受信部7650、車内機器I/F7660、音声画像出力部7670、車載ネットワークI/F7680及び記憶部7690が図示されている。他の制御ユニットも同様に、マイクロコンピュータ、通信I/F及び記憶部等を備える。 Each control unit includes a microcomputer that performs arithmetic processing according to various programs, a storage unit that stores a program executed by the microcomputer or parameters used for various arithmetics, and a drive circuit that drives various control target devices. To be equipped. Each control unit is provided with a network I / F for communicating with other control units via the communication network 7010, and is connected to devices or sensors inside or outside the vehicle by wired communication or wireless communication. A communication I / F for performing communication is provided. In FIG. 19, as the functional configuration of the integrated control unit 7600, the microcomputer 7610, the general-purpose communication I / F 7620, the dedicated communication I / F 7630, the positioning unit 7640, the beacon receiving unit 7650, the in-vehicle device I / F 7660, the audio image output unit 7670, The vehicle-mounted network I / F 7680 and the storage unit 7690 are shown. Other control units also include a microcomputer, a communication I / F, a storage unit, and the like.
 駆動系制御ユニット7100は、各種プログラムにしたがって車両の駆動系に関連する装置の動作を制御する。例えば、駆動系制御ユニット7100は、内燃機関又は駆動用モータ等の車両の駆動力を発生させるための駆動力発生装置、駆動力を車輪に伝達するための駆動力伝達機構、車両の舵角を調節するステアリング機構、及び、車両の制動力を発生させる制動装置等の制御装置として機能する。駆動系制御ユニット7100は、ABS(Antilock Brake System)又はESC(Electronic Stability Control)等の制御装置としての機能を有してもよい。 The drive system control unit 7100 controls the operation of the device related to the drive system of the vehicle according to various programs. For example, the drive system control unit 7100 provides a driving force generator for generating the driving force of the vehicle such as an internal combustion engine or a driving motor, a driving force transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force to the wheels, and a steering angle of the vehicle. It functions as a control device such as a steering mechanism for adjusting and a braking device for generating a braking force of a vehicle. The drive system control unit 7100 may have a function as a control device such as ABS (Antilock Brake System) or ESC (Electronic Stability Control).
 駆動系制御ユニット7100には、車両状態検出部7110が接続される。車両状態検出部7110には、例えば、車体の軸回転運動の角速度を検出するジャイロセンサ、車両の加速度を検出する加速度センサ、あるいは、アクセルペダルの操作量、ブレーキペダルの操作量、ステアリングホイールの操舵角、エンジン回転数又は車輪の回転速度等を検出するためのセンサのうちの少なくとも一つが含まれる。駆動系制御ユニット7100は、車両状態検出部7110から入力される信号を用いて演算処理を行い、内燃機関、駆動用モータ、電動パワーステアリング装置又はブレーキ装置等を制御する。 The vehicle condition detection unit 7110 is connected to the drive system control unit 7100. The vehicle state detection unit 7110 may include, for example, a gyro sensor that detects the angular velocity of the rotational movement of the vehicle body, an acceleration sensor that detects the acceleration of the vehicle, an accelerator pedal operation amount, a brake pedal operation amount, or steering wheel steering. It includes at least one of sensors for detecting an angle, engine speed, wheel speed, and the like. The drive system control unit 7100 performs arithmetic processing using a signal input from the vehicle state detection unit 7110 to control an internal combustion engine, a drive motor, an electric power steering device, a brake device, and the like.
 ボディ系制御ユニット7200は、各種プログラムにしたがって車体に装備された各種装置の動作を制御する。例えば、ボディ系制御ユニット7200は、キーレスエントリシステム、スマートキーシステム、パワーウィンドウ装置、あるいは、ヘッドランプ、バックランプ、ブレーキランプ、ウィンカー又はフォグランプ等の各種ランプの制御装置として機能する。この場合、ボディ系制御ユニット7200には、鍵を代替する携帯機から発信される電波又は各種スイッチの信号が入力され得る。ボディ系制御ユニット7200は、これらの電波又は信号の入力を受け付け、車両のドアロック装置、パワーウィンドウ装置、ランプ等を制御する。 The body system control unit 7200 controls the operation of various devices mounted on the vehicle body according to various programs. For example, the body system control unit 7200 functions as a keyless entry system, a smart key system, a power window device, or a control device for various lamps such as headlamps, back lamps, brake lamps, blinkers or fog lamps. In this case, the body system control unit 7200 may be input with radio waves transmitted from a portable device that substitutes for the key or signals of various switches. The body system control unit 7200 receives inputs of these radio waves or signals and controls a vehicle door lock device, a power window device, a lamp, and the like.
 バッテリ制御ユニット7300は、各種プログラムにしたがって駆動用モータの電力供給源である二次電池7310を制御する。例えば、バッテリ制御ユニット7300には、二次電池7310を備えたバッテリ装置から、バッテリ温度、バッテリ出力電圧又はバッテリの残存容量等の情報が入力される。バッテリ制御ユニット7300は、これらの信号を用いて演算処理を行い、二次電池7310の温度調節制御又はバッテリ装置に備えられた冷却装置等の制御を行う。 The battery control unit 7300 controls the secondary battery 7310, which is the power supply source of the drive motor, according to various programs. For example, information such as the battery temperature, the battery output voltage, or the remaining capacity of the battery is input to the battery control unit 7300 from the battery device including the secondary battery 7310. The battery control unit 7300 performs arithmetic processing using these signals, and controls the temperature control of the secondary battery 7310 or the cooling device provided in the battery device.
 車外情報検出ユニット7400は、車両制御システム7000を搭載した車両の外部の情報を検出する。例えば、車外情報検出ユニット7400には、撮像部7410及び車外情報検出部7420のうちの少なくとも一方が接続される。撮像部7410には、ToF(Time Of Flight)カメラ、ステレオカメラ、単眼カメラ、赤外線カメラ及びその他のカメラのうちの少なくとも一つが含まれる。車外情報検出部7420には、例えば、現在の天候又は気象を検出するための環境センサ、あるいは、車両制御システム7000を搭載した車両の周囲の他の車両、障害物又は歩行者等を検出するための周囲情報検出センサのうちの少なくとも一つが含まれる。 The vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 detects information outside the vehicle equipped with the vehicle control system 7000. For example, at least one of the image pickup unit 7410 and the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7420 is connected to the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400. The imaging unit 7410 includes at least one of a ToF (Time Of Flight) camera, a stereo camera, a monocular camera, an infrared camera, and other cameras. The vehicle exterior information detection unit 7420 is used to detect, for example, the current weather or an environmental sensor for detecting the weather, or other vehicles, obstacles, pedestrians, etc. around the vehicle equipped with the vehicle control system 7000. At least one of the ambient information detection sensors is included.
 環境センサは、例えば、雨天を検出する雨滴センサ、霧を検出する霧センサ、日照度合いを検出する日照センサ、及び降雪を検出する雪センサのうちの少なくとも一つであってよい。周囲情報検出センサは、超音波センサ、レーダ装置及びLIDAR(Light Detection and Ranging、Laser Imaging Detection and Ranging)装置のうちの少なくとも一つであってよい。これらの撮像部7410及び車外情報検出部7420は、それぞれ独立したセンサないし装置として備えられてもよいし、複数のセンサないし装置が統合された装置として備えられてもよい。 The environmental sensor may be, for example, at least one of a raindrop sensor that detects rainy weather, a fog sensor that detects fog, a sunshine sensor that detects the degree of sunshine, and a snow sensor that detects snowfall. The ambient information detection sensor may be at least one of an ultrasonic sensor, a radar device, and a LIDAR (Light Detection and Ranging, Laser Imaging Detection and Ranging) device. The imaging unit 7410 and the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7420 may be provided as independent sensors or devices, or may be provided as a device in which a plurality of sensors or devices are integrated.
 ここで、図20は、撮像部7410及び車外情報検出部7420の設置位置の例を示す。撮像部7910、7912、7914、7916、7918は、例えば、車両7900のフロントノーズ、サイドミラー、リアバンパ、バックドア及び車室内のフロントガラスの上部のうちの少なくとも一つの位置に設けられる。フロントノーズに備えられる撮像部7910及び車室内のフロントガラスの上部に備えられる撮像部7918は、主として車両7900の前方の画像を取得する。サイドミラーに備えられる撮像部7912、7914は、主として車両7900の側方の画像を取得する。リアバンパ又はバックドアに備えられる撮像部7916は、主として車両7900の後方の画像を取得する。車室内のフロントガラスの上部に備えられる撮像部7918は、主として先行車両又は、歩行者、障害物、信号機、交通標識又は車線等の検出に用いられる。 Here, FIG. 20 shows an example of the installation positions of the imaging unit 7410 and the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7420. The imaging units 7910, 7912, 7914, 7916, 7918 are provided, for example, at at least one of the front nose, side mirrors, rear bumpers, back door, and upper part of the windshield of the vehicle interior of the vehicle 7900. The image pickup unit 7910 provided on the front nose and the image pickup section 7918 provided on the upper part of the windshield in the vehicle interior mainly acquire an image in front of the vehicle 7900. The imaging units 7912 and 7914 provided in the side mirrors mainly acquire images of the side of the vehicle 7900. The image pickup unit 7916 provided on the rear bumper or the back door mainly acquires an image of the rear of the vehicle 7900. The imaging unit 7918 provided on the upper part of the windshield in the vehicle interior is mainly used for detecting a preceding vehicle, a pedestrian, an obstacle, a traffic light, a traffic sign, a lane, or the like.
 なお、図20には、それぞれの撮像部7910、7912、7914、7916の撮影範囲の一例が示されている。撮像範囲aは、フロントノーズに設けられた撮像部7910の撮像範囲を示し、撮像範囲b、cは、それぞれサイドミラーに設けられた撮像部7912、7914の撮像範囲を示し、撮像範囲dは、リアバンパ又はバックドアに設けられた撮像部7916の撮像範囲を示す。例えば、撮像部7910、7912、7914、7916で撮像された画像データが重ね合わせられることにより、車両7900を上方から見た俯瞰画像が得られる。 Note that FIG. 20 shows an example of the photographing range of each of the imaging units 7910, 7912, 7914, and 7916. The imaging range a indicates the imaging range of the imaging unit 7910 provided on the front nose, the imaging ranges b and c indicate the imaging ranges of the imaging units 7912 and 7914 provided on the side mirrors, respectively, and the imaging range d indicates the imaging range d. The imaging range of the imaging unit 7916 provided on the rear bumper or the back door is shown. For example, by superimposing the image data captured by the imaging units 7910, 7912, 7914, and 7916, a bird's-eye view image of the vehicle 7900 as viewed from above can be obtained.
 車両7900のフロント、リア、サイド、コーナ及び車室内のフロントガラスの上部に設けられる車外情報検出部7920、7922、7924、7926、7928、7930は、例えば超音波センサ又はレーダ装置であってよい。車両7900のフロントノーズ、リアバンパ、バックドア及び車室内のフロントガラスの上部に設けられる車外情報検出部7920、7926、7930は、例えばLIDAR装置であってよい。これらの車外情報検出部7920~7930は、主として先行車両、歩行者又は障害物等の検出に用いられる。 The vehicle exterior information detection units 7920, 7922, 7924, 7926, 7928, 7930 provided on the front, rear, side, corners and the upper part of the windshield in the vehicle interior of the vehicle 7900 may be, for example, an ultrasonic sensor or a radar device. The vehicle exterior information detection units 7920, 7926, 7930 provided on the front nose, rear bumper, back door, and upper part of the windshield in the vehicle interior of the vehicle 7900 may be, for example, a lidar device. These out-of-vehicle information detection units 7920 to 7930 are mainly used for detecting a preceding vehicle, a pedestrian, an obstacle, or the like.
 図19に戻って説明を続ける。車外情報検出ユニット7400は、撮像部7410に車外の画像を撮像させるとともに、撮像された画像データを受信する。また、車外情報検出ユニット7400は、接続されている車外情報検出部7420から検出情報を受信する。車外情報検出部7420が超音波センサ、レーダ装置又はLIDAR装置である場合には、車外情報検出ユニット7400は、超音波又は電磁波等を発信させるとともに、受信された反射波の情報を受信する。車外情報検出ユニット7400は、受信した情報に基づいて、人、車、障害物、標識又は路面上の文字等の物体検出処理又は距離検出処理を行ってもよい。車外情報検出ユニット7400は、受信した情報に基づいて、降雨、霧又は路面状況等を認識する環境認識処理を行ってもよい。車外情報検出ユニット7400は、受信した情報に基づいて、車外の物体までの距離を算出してもよい。 Return to Fig. 19 and continue the explanation. The vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 causes the image pickup unit 7410 to capture an image of the vehicle exterior and receives the captured image data. Further, the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 receives detection information from the connected vehicle exterior information detection unit 7420. When the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7420 is an ultrasonic sensor, a radar device, or a LIDAR device, the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 transmits ultrasonic waves, electromagnetic waves, or the like, and receives the received reflected wave information. The vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 may perform object detection processing or distance detection processing such as a person, a vehicle, an obstacle, a sign, or a character on a road surface based on the received information. The vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 may perform an environment recognition process for recognizing rainfall, fog, road surface conditions, etc., based on the received information. The vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 may calculate the distance to an object outside the vehicle based on the received information.
 また、車外情報検出ユニット7400は、受信した画像データに基づいて、人、車、障害物、標識又は路面上の文字等を認識する画像認識処理又は距離検出処理を行ってもよい。車外情報検出ユニット7400は、受信した画像データに対して歪補正又は位置合わせ等の処理を行うとともに、異なる撮像部7410により撮像された画像データを合成して、俯瞰画像又はパノラマ画像を生成してもよい。車外情報検出ユニット7400は、異なる撮像部7410により撮像された画像データを用いて、視点変換処理を行ってもよい。 Further, the vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 may perform image recognition processing or distance detection processing for recognizing a person, a vehicle, an obstacle, a sign, a character on the road surface, or the like based on the received image data. The vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 performs processing such as distortion correction or alignment on the received image data, and synthesizes the image data captured by different imaging units 7410 to generate a bird's-eye view image or a panoramic image. May be good. The vehicle exterior information detection unit 7400 may perform the viewpoint conversion process using the image data captured by different imaging units 7410.
 車内情報検出ユニット7500は、車内の情報を検出する。車内情報検出ユニット7500には、例えば、運転者の状態を検出する運転者状態検出部7510が接続される。運転者状態検出部7510は、運転者を撮像するカメラ、運転者の生体情報を検出する生体センサ又は車室内の音声を集音するマイク等を含んでもよい。生体センサは、例えば、座面又はステアリングホイール等に設けられ、座席に座った搭乗者又はステアリングホイールを握る運転者の生体情報を検出する。車内情報検出ユニット7500は、運転者状態検出部7510から入力される検出情報に基づいて、運転者の疲労度合い又は集中度合いを算出してもよいし、運転者が居眠りをしていないかを判別してもよい。車内情報検出ユニット7500は、集音された音声信号に対してノイズキャンセリング処理等の処理を行ってもよい。 The in-vehicle information detection unit 7500 detects the in-vehicle information. For example, a driver state detection unit 7510 that detects the driver's state is connected to the in-vehicle information detection unit 7500. The driver state detection unit 7510 may include a camera that captures the driver, a biosensor that detects the driver's biological information, a microphone that collects sound in the vehicle interior, and the like. The biosensor is provided on, for example, the seat surface or the steering wheel, and detects the biometric information of the passenger sitting on the seat or the driver holding the steering wheel. The in-vehicle information detection unit 7500 may calculate the degree of fatigue or concentration of the driver based on the detection information input from the driver state detection unit 7510, and may determine whether the driver is dozing or not. You may. The in-vehicle information detection unit 7500 may perform processing such as noise canceling processing on the collected audio signal.
 統合制御ユニット7600は、各種プログラムにしたがって車両制御システム7000内の動作全般を制御する。統合制御ユニット7600には、入力部7800が接続されている。入力部7800は、例えば、タッチパネル、ボタン、マイクロフォン、スイッチ又はレバー等、搭乗者によって入力操作され得る装置によって実現される。統合制御ユニット7600には、マイクロフォンにより入力される音声を音声認識することにより得たデータが入力されてもよい。入力部7800は、例えば、赤外線又はその他の電波を利用したリモートコントロール装置であってもよいし、車両制御システム7000の操作に対応した携帯電話又はPDA(Personal Digital Assistant)等の外部接続機器であってもよい。入力部7800は、例えばカメラであってもよく、その場合搭乗者はジェスチャにより情報を入力することができる。あるいは、搭乗者が装着したウェアラブル装置の動きを検出することで得られたデータが入力されてもよい。さらに、入力部7800は、例えば、上記の入力部7800を用いて搭乗者等により入力された情報に基づいて入力信号を生成し、統合制御ユニット7600に出力する入力制御回路などを含んでもよい。搭乗者等は、この入力部7800を操作することにより、車両制御システム7000に対して各種のデータを入力したり処理動作を指示したりする。 The integrated control unit 7600 controls the overall operation in the vehicle control system 7000 according to various programs. An input unit 7800 is connected to the integrated control unit 7600. The input unit 7800 is realized by a device such as a touch panel, a button, a microphone, a switch or a lever, which can be input-operated by a passenger. Data obtained by recognizing the voice input by the microphone may be input to the integrated control unit 7600. The input unit 7800 may be, for example, a remote control device using infrared rays or other radio waves, or an externally connected device such as a mobile phone or a PDA (Personal Digital Assistant) that supports the operation of the vehicle control system 7000. You may. The input unit 7800 may be, for example, a camera, in which case the passenger can input information by gesture. Alternatively, data obtained by detecting the movement of the wearable device worn by the passenger may be input. Further, the input unit 7800 may include, for example, an input control circuit that generates an input signal based on the information input by the passenger or the like using the input unit 7800 and outputs the input signal to the integrated control unit 7600. By operating the input unit 7800, the passenger or the like inputs various data to the vehicle control system 7000 and instructs the processing operation.
 記憶部7690は、マイクロコンピュータにより実行される各種プログラムを記憶するROM(Read Only Memory)、及び各種パラメータ、演算結果又はセンサ値等を記憶するRAM(Random Access Memory)を含んでいてもよい。また、記憶部7690は、H駆動モーター(Hard Disc Drive)等の磁気記憶デバイス、半導体記憶デバイス、光記憶デバイス又は光磁気記憶デバイス等によって実現してもよい。 The storage unit 7690 may include a ROM (Read Only Memory) for storing various programs executed by the microcomputer, and a RAM (Random Access Memory) for storing various parameters, calculation results, sensor values, and the like. Further, the storage unit 7690 may be realized by a magnetic storage device such as an H drive motor (Hard Disc Drive), a semiconductor storage device, an optical storage device, an optical magnetic storage device, or the like.
 汎用通信I/F7620は、外部環境7750に存在する様々な機器との間の通信を仲介する汎用的な通信I/Fである。汎用通信I/F7620は、GSM(登録商標)(Global System of Mobile communications)、WiMAX(登録商標)、LTE(登録商標)(Long Term Evolution)若しくはLTE-A(LTE-Advanced)などのセルラー通信プロトコル、又は無線LAN(Wi-Fi(登録商標)ともいう)、Bluetooth(登録商標)などのその他の無線通信プロトコルを実装してよい。汎用通信I/F7620は、例えば、基地局又はアクセスポイントを介して、外部ネットワーク(例えば、インターネット、クラウドネットワーク又は事業者固有のネットワーク)上に存在する機器(例えば、アプリケーションサーバ又は制御サーバ)へ接続してもよい。また、汎用通信I/F7620は、例えばP2P(Peer To Peer)技術を用いて、車両の近傍に存在する端末(例えば、運転者、歩行者若しくは店舗の端末、又はMTC(Machine Type Communication)端末)と接続してもよい。 The general-purpose communication I / F 7620 is a general-purpose communication I / F that mediates communication with various devices existing in the external environment 7750. General-purpose communication I / F7620 is a cellular communication protocol such as GSM (registered trademark) (Global System of Mobile communications), WiMAX (registered trademark), LTE (registered trademark) (Long Term Evolution) or LTE-A (LTE-Advanced). , Or other wireless communication protocols such as wireless LAN (also referred to as Wi-Fi®), Bluetooth® may be implemented. The general-purpose communication I / F7620 connects to a device (for example, an application server or a control server) existing on an external network (for example, the Internet, a cloud network, or a business-specific network) via a base station or an access point, for example. You may. Further, the general-purpose communication I / F7620 uses, for example, P2P (Peer To Peer) technology, and is a terminal existing in the vicinity of the vehicle (for example, a terminal of a driver, a pedestrian or a store, or an MTC (Machine Type Communication) terminal). You may connect with.
 専用通信I/F7630は、車両における使用を目的として策定された通信プロトコルをサポートする通信I/Fである。専用通信I/F7630は、例えば、下位レイヤのIEEE802.11pと上位レイヤのIEEE1609との組合せであるWAVE(Wireless Access in Vehicle Environment)、DSRC(Dedicated Short Range Communications)、又はセルラー通信プロトコルといった標準プロトコルを実装してよい。専用通信I/F7630は、典型的には、車車間(Vehicle to Vehicle)通信、路車間(Vehicle to Infrastructure)通信、車両と家との間(Vehicle to Home)の通信及び歩車間(Vehicle to Pedestrian)通信のうちの1つ以上を含む概念であるV2X通信を遂行する。 The dedicated communication I / F 7630 is a communication I / F that supports a communication protocol formulated for use in a vehicle. The dedicated communication I / F7630 uses a standard protocol such as WAVE (Wireless Access in Vehicle Environment), DSRC (Dedicated Short Range Communications), or cellular communication protocol, which is a combination of IEEE802.11p in the lower layer and IEEE1609 in the upper layer. May be implemented. The dedicated communication I / F7630 typically includes vehicle-to-vehicle (Vehicle to Vehicle) communication, road-to-vehicle (Vehicle to Infrastructure) communication, vehicle-to-home (Vehicle to Home) communication, and pedestrian-to-pedestrian (Vehicle to Pedertian) communication. ) Carry out V2X communication, a concept that includes one or more of the communications.
 測位部7640は、例えば、GNそれぞれ(Global Navigation Satellite System)衛星からのGNそれぞれ信号(例えば、GPS(Global Positioning System)衛星からのGPS信号)を受信して測位を実行し、車両の緯度、経度及び高度を含む位置情報を生成する。なお、測位部7640は、無線アクセスポイントとの信号の交換により現在位置を特定してもよく、又は測位機能を有する携帯電話、PHS若しくはスマートフォンといった端末から位置情報を取得してもよい。 For example, the positioning unit 7640 receives signals from each GN (Global Navigation Satellite System) satellite (for example, GPS signals from a GPS (Global Positioning System) satellite), executes positioning, and executes positioning, and the latitude and longitude of the vehicle. And generate location information including altitude. The positioning unit 7640 may specify the current position by exchanging signals with the wireless access point, or may acquire position information from a terminal such as a mobile phone, PHS, or smartphone having a positioning function.
 ビーコン受信部7650は、例えば、道路上に設置された無線局等から発信される電波あるいは電磁波を受信し、現在位置、渋滞、通行止め又は所要時間等の情報を取得する。なお、ビーコン受信部7650の機能は、上述した専用通信I/F7630に含まれてもよい。 The beacon receiving unit 7650 receives radio waves or electromagnetic waves transmitted from a radio station or the like installed on the road, and acquires information such as the current position, traffic jam, road closure, or required time. The function of the beacon receiving unit 7650 may be included in the above-mentioned dedicated communication I / F 7630.
 車内機器I/F7660は、マイクロコンピュータ7610と車内に存在する様々な車内機器7760との間の接続を仲介する通信インタフェースである。車内機器I/F7660は、無線LAN、Bluetooth(登録商標)、NFC(Near Field Communication)又はWUSB(Wireless USB)といった無線通信プロトコルを用いて無線接続を確立してもよい。また、車内機器I/F7660は、図示しない接続端子(及び、必要であればケーブル)を介して、USB(Universal Serial Bus)、HDMI(登録商標)(High-Definition Multimedia Interface、又はMHL(Mobile High-definition Link)等の有線接続を確立してもよい。車内機器7760は、例えば、搭乗者が有するモバイル機器若しくはウェアラブル機器、又は車両に搬入され若しくは取り付けられる情報機器のうちの少なくとも1つを含んでいてもよい。また、車内機器7760は、任意の目的地までの経路探索を行うナビゲーション装置を含んでいてもよい。車内機器I/F7660は、これらの車内機器7760との間で、制御信号又はデータ信号を交換する。 The in-vehicle device I / F 7660 is a communication interface that mediates the connection between the microcomputer 7610 and various in-vehicle devices 7760 existing in the vehicle. The in-vehicle device I / F7660 may establish a wireless connection using a wireless communication protocol such as wireless LAN, Bluetooth (registered trademark), NFC (Near Field Communication) or WUSB (Wireless USB). In addition, the in-vehicle device I / F7660 is connected via a connection terminal (and a cable if necessary) (not shown), USB (Universal Serial Bus), HDMI (registered trademark) (High-Definition Multimedia Interface, or MHL (Mobile High)). A wired connection such as -definition Link) may be established. The in-vehicle device 7760 includes, for example, at least one of a mobile device or a wearable device owned by a passenger, or an information device carried in or attached to a vehicle. Further, the in-vehicle device 7760 may include a navigation device that searches for a route to an arbitrary destination. The in-vehicle device I / F 7660 is a control signal to and from these in-vehicle devices 7760. Or exchange the data signal.
 車載ネットワークI/F7680は、マイクロコンピュータ7610と通信ネットワーク7010との間の通信を仲介するインタフェースである。車載ネットワークI/F7680は、通信ネットワーク7010によりサポートされる所定のプロトコルに則して、信号等を送受信する。 The in-vehicle network I / F7680 is an interface that mediates communication between the microcomputer 7610 and the communication network 7010. The vehicle-mounted network I / F7680 transmits / receives signals and the like according to a predetermined protocol supported by the communication network 7010.
 統合制御ユニット7600のマイクロコンピュータ7610は、汎用通信I/F7620、専用通信I/F7630、測位部7640、ビーコン受信部7650、車内機器I/F7660及び車載ネットワークI/F7680のうちの少なくとも一つを介して取得される情報に基づき、各種プログラムにしたがって、車両制御システム7000を制御する。例えば、マイクロコンピュータ7610は、取得される車内外の情報に基づいて、駆動力発生装置、ステアリング機構又は制動装置の制御目標値を演算し、駆動系制御ユニット7100に対して制御指令を出力してもよい。例えば、マイクロコンピュータ7610は、車両の衝突回避あるいは衝撃緩和、車間距離に基づく追従走行、車速維持走行、車両の衝突警告、又は車両のレーン逸脱警告等を含むADAS(Advanced Driver Assistance System)の機能実現を目的とした協調制御を行ってもよい。また、マイクロコンピュータ7610は、取得される車両の周囲の情報に基づいて駆動力発生装置、ステアリング機構又は制動装置等を制御することにより、運転者の操作に拠らずに自律的に走行する自動運転等を目的とした協調制御を行ってもよい。 The microcomputer 7610 of the integrated control unit 7600 is via at least one of general-purpose communication I / F7620, dedicated communication I / F7630, positioning unit 7640, beacon receiving unit 7650, in-vehicle device I / F7660, and in-vehicle network I / F7680. The vehicle control system 7000 is controlled according to various programs based on the information acquired. For example, the microcomputer 7610 calculates the control target value of the driving force generator, the steering mechanism, or the braking device based on the acquired information inside and outside the vehicle, and outputs a control command to the drive system control unit 7100. May be good. For example, the microcomputer 7610 realizes ADAS (Advanced Driver Assistance System) functions including vehicle collision avoidance or impact mitigation, follow-up driving based on inter-vehicle distance, vehicle speed maintenance driving, vehicle collision warning, vehicle lane deviation warning, and the like. Cooperative control may be performed for the purpose of. Further, the microcomputer 7610 automatically travels autonomously without relying on the driver's operation by controlling the driving force generator, the steering mechanism, the braking device, etc. based on the acquired information on the surroundings of the vehicle. Coordinated control for the purpose of driving or the like may be performed.
 マイクロコンピュータ7610は、汎用通信I/F7620、専用通信I/F7630、測位部7640、ビーコン受信部7650、車内機器I/F7660及び車載ネットワークI/F7680のうちの少なくとも一つを介して取得される情報に基づき、車両と周辺の構造物や人物等の物体との間の3次元距離情報を生成し、車両の現在位置の周辺情報を含むローカル地図情報を作成してもよい。また、マイクロコンピュータ7610は、取得される情報に基づき、車両の衝突、歩行者等の近接又は通行止めの道路への進入等の危険を予測し、警告用信号を生成してもよい。警告用信号は、例えば、警告音を発生させたり、警告ランプを点灯させたりするための信号であってよい。 The microcomputer 7610 has information acquired via at least one of general-purpose communication I / F7620, dedicated communication I / F7630, positioning unit 7640, beacon receiving unit 7650, in-vehicle device I / F7660, and in-vehicle network I / F7680. Based on the above, three-dimensional distance information between the vehicle and an object such as a surrounding structure or a person may be generated, and local map information including the peripheral information of the current position of the vehicle may be created. Further, the microcomputer 7610 may predict the danger of a vehicle collision, a pedestrian or the like approaching or entering a closed road based on the acquired information, and generate a warning signal. The warning signal may be, for example, a signal for generating a warning sound or turning on a warning lamp.
 音声画像出力部7670は、車両の搭乗者又は車外に対して、視覚的又は聴覚的に情報を通知することが可能な出力装置へ音声及び画像のうちの少なくとも一方の出力信号を送信する。図19の例では、出力装置として、オーディオスピーカ7710、表示部7720及びインストルメントパネル7730が例示されている。表示部7720は、例えば、オンボードディスプレイ及びヘッドアップディスプレイの少なくとも一つを含んでいてもよい。表示部7720は、AR(Augmented Reality)表示機能を有していてもよい。出力装置は、これらの装置以外の、ヘッドホン、搭乗者が装着する眼鏡型ディスプレイ等のウェアラブルデバイス、プロジェクタ又はランプ等の他の装置であってもよい。出力装置が表示装置の場合、表示装置は、マイクロコンピュータ7610が行った各種処理により得られた結果又は他の制御ユニットから受信された情報を、テキスト、イメージ、表、グラフ等、様々な形式で視覚的に表示する。また、出力装置が音声出力装置の場合、音声出力装置は、再生された音声データ又は音響データ等からなるオーディオ信号をアナログ信号に変換して聴覚的に出力する。 The audio / image output unit 7670 transmits an output signal of at least one of audio and an image to an output device capable of visually or audibly notifying the passenger of the vehicle or the outside of the vehicle. In the example of FIG. 19, an audio speaker 7710, a display unit 7720, and an instrument panel 7730 are exemplified as output devices. The display unit 7720 may include, for example, at least one of an onboard display and a head-up display. The display unit 7720 may have an AR (Augmented Reality) display function. The output device may be other devices such as headphones, wearable devices such as eyeglass-type displays worn by passengers, projectors or lamps other than these devices. When the output device is a display device, the display device displays the results obtained by various processes performed by the microcomputer 7610 or the information received from other control units in various formats such as texts, images, tables, and graphs. Display visually. When the output device is an audio output device, the audio output device converts an audio signal composed of reproduced audio data or acoustic data into an analog signal and outputs the audio signal audibly.
 なお、図19に示した例において、通信ネットワーク7010を介して接続された少なくとも二つの制御ユニットが一つの制御ユニットとして一体化されてもよい。あるいは、個々の制御ユニットが、複数の制御ユニットにより構成されてもよい。さらに、車両制御システム7000が、図示されていない別の制御ユニットを備えてもよい。また、上記の説明において、いずれかの制御ユニットが担う機能の一部又は全部を、他の制御ユニットに持たせてもよい。つまり、通信ネットワーク7010を介して情報の送受信がされるようになっていれば、所定の演算処理が、いずれかの制御ユニットで行われるようになってもよい。同様に、いずれかの制御ユニットに接続されているセンサ又は装置が、他の制御ユニットに接続されるとともに、複数の制御ユニットが、通信ネットワーク7010を介して相互に検出情報を送受信してもよい。 In the example shown in FIG. 19, at least two control units connected via the communication network 7010 may be integrated as one control unit. Alternatively, each control unit may be composed of a plurality of control units. In addition, the vehicle control system 7000 may include another control unit (not shown). Further, in the above description, the other control unit may have a part or all of the functions carried out by any of the control units. That is, as long as information is transmitted and received via the communication network 7010, predetermined arithmetic processing may be performed by any control unit. Similarly, a sensor or device connected to any control unit may be connected to another control unit, and a plurality of control units may send and receive detection information to and from each other via the communication network 7010. ..
 なお、図Zを用いて説明した本実施形態に係る情報処理装置100の各機能を実現するためのコンピュータプログラムを、いずれかの制御ユニット等に実装することができる。また、このようなコンピュータプログラムが格納された、コンピュータで読み取り可能な記録媒体を提供することもできる。記録媒体は、例えば、磁気ディスク、光ディスク、光磁気ディスク、フラッシュメモリ等である。また、上記のコンピュータプログラムは、記録媒体を用いずに、例えばネットワークを介して配信されてもよい。 It should be noted that a computer program for realizing each function of the information processing apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment described with reference to FIG. Z can be implemented in any control unit or the like. It is also possible to provide a computer-readable recording medium in which such a computer program is stored. The recording medium is, for example, a magnetic disk, an optical disk, a magneto-optical disk, a flash memory, or the like. Further, the above computer program may be distributed via, for example, a network without using a recording medium.
 <応用例2>
 本開示に係る技術は、様々な製品へ応用することができる。例えば、本開示に係る技術は、手術室システムに適用されてもよい。特に、駆動モーター44、44Xは、例えば、手術室システムにおける各器具を動作させるための駆動部として用いられてもよい。
<Application example 2>
The technology according to the present disclosure can be applied to various products. For example, the techniques according to the present disclosure may be applied to operating room systems. In particular, the drive motors 44, 44X may be used, for example, as a drive unit for operating each instrument in the operating room system.
 図21は、本開示に係る技術が適用され得る手術室システム5100の全体構成を概略的に示す図である。図21を参照すると、手術室システム5100は、手術室内に設置される装置群が視聴覚コントローラ(AV Controller)5107及び手術室制御装置5109を介して互いに連携可能に接続されることにより構成される。 FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically showing the overall configuration of the operating room system 5100 to which the technique according to the present disclosure can be applied. Referring to FIG. 21, the operating room system 5100 is configured by connecting a group of devices installed in the operating room in a coordinated manner via an audiovisual controller (AV Controller) 5107 and an operating room control device 5109.
 手術室には、様々な装置が設置され得る。図21では、一例として、内視鏡下手術のための各種の装置群5101と、手術室の天井に設けられ術者の手元を撮像するシーリングカメラ5187と、手術室の天井に設けられ手術室全体の様子を撮像する術場カメラ5189と、複数の表示装置5103A~5103Dと、レコーダ5105と、患者ベッド5183と、照明5191と、を図示している。 Various devices can be installed in the operating room. In FIG. 21, as an example, various device groups 5101 for endoscopic surgery, a ceiling camera 5187 provided on the ceiling of the operating room to capture the operator's hand, and an operating room provided on the ceiling of the operating room. An operating room camera 5189 that captures the entire state, a plurality of display devices 5103A to 5103D, a recorder 5105, a patient bed 5183, and an illumination 5191 are illustrated.
 ここで、これらの装置のうち、装置群5101は、後述する内視鏡手術システム5113に属するものであり、内視鏡や当該内視鏡によって撮像された画像を表示する表示装置等からなる。内視鏡手術システム5113に属する各装置は医療用機器とも呼称される。一方、表示装置5103A~5103D、レコーダ5105、患者ベッド5183及び照明5191は、内視鏡手術システム5113とは別個に、例えば手術室に備え付けられている装置である。これらの内視鏡手術システム5113に属さない各装置は非医療用機器とも呼称される。視聴覚コントローラ5107及び/又は手術室制御装置5109は、これら医療機器及び非医療機器の動作を互いに連携して制御する。 Here, among these devices, the device group 5101 belongs to the endoscopic surgery system 5113 described later, and includes an endoscope, a display device that displays an image captured by the endoscope, and the like. Each device belonging to the endoscopic surgery system 5113 is also referred to as a medical device. On the other hand, the display devices 5103A to 5103D, the recorder 5105, the patient bed 5183, and the lighting 5191 are devices provided in the operating room, for example, separately from the endoscopic surgery system 5113. Each of these devices that does not belong to the endoscopic surgery system 5113 is also referred to as a non-medical device. The audiovisual controller 5107 and / or the operating room controller 5109 controls the operations of these medical devices and non-medical devices in cooperation with each other.
 視聴覚コントローラ5107は、医療機器及び非医療機器における画像表示に関する処理を、統括的に制御する。具体的には、手術室システム5100が備える装置のうち、装置群5101、シーリングカメラ5187及び術場カメラ5189は、手術中に表示すべき情報(以下、表示情報ともいう)を発信する機能を有する装置(以下、発信元の装置とも呼称する)であり得る。また、表示装置5103A~5103Dは、表示情報が出力される装置(以下、出力先の装置とも呼称する)であり得る。また、レコーダ5105は、発信元の装置及び出力先の装置の双方に該当する装置であり得る。視聴覚コントローラ5107は、発信元の装置及び出力先の装置の動作を制御し、発信元の装置から表示情報を取得するとともに、当該表示情報を出力先の装置に送信し、表示又は記録させる機能を有する。なお、表示情報とは、手術中に撮像された各種の画像や、手術に関する各種の情報(例えば、患者の身体情報や、過去の検査結果、術式についての情報等)等である。 The audiovisual controller 5107 comprehensively controls processing related to image display in medical devices and non-medical devices. Specifically, among the devices included in the operating room system 5100, the device group 5101, the sealing camera 5187, and the operating room camera 5189 have a function of transmitting information to be displayed during the operation (hereinafter, also referred to as display information). It can be a device (hereinafter, also referred to as a source device). Further, the display devices 5103A to 5103D may be devices for outputting display information (hereinafter, also referred to as output destination devices). Further, the recorder 5105 may be a device corresponding to both the source device and the output destination device. The audiovisual controller 5107 controls the operation of the source device and the output destination device, acquires display information from the source device, and transmits the display information to the output destination device for display or recording. Have. The displayed information includes various images captured during the operation, various information related to the operation (for example, physical information of the patient, past test results, information on the surgical procedure, etc.).
 具体的には、視聴覚コントローラ5107には、装置群5101から、表示情報として、内視鏡によって撮像された患者の体腔内の術部の画像についての情報が送信され得る。また、シーリングカメラ5187から、表示情報として、当該シーリングカメラ5187によって撮像された術者の手元の画像についての情報が送信され得る。また、術場カメラ5189から、表示情報として、当該術場カメラ5189によって撮像された手術室全体の様子を示す画像についての情報が送信され得る。なお、手術室システム5100に撮像機能を有する他の装置が存在する場合には、視聴覚コントローラ5107は、表示情報として、当該他の装置からも当該他の装置によって撮像された画像についての情報を取得してもよい。 Specifically, the audiovisual controller 5107 can be transmitted from the device group 5101 as display information about an image of the surgical site in the body cavity of the patient captured by the endoscope. In addition, the sealing camera 5187 may transmit information about the image at the operator's hand captured by the sealing camera 5187 as display information. In addition, the operating room camera 5189 may transmit as display information information about an image showing the state of the entire operating room captured by the operating room camera 5189. When the operating room system 5100 has another device having an imaging function, the audiovisual controller 5107 also acquires information about an image captured by the other device from the other device as display information. You may.
 あるいは、例えば、レコーダ5105には、過去に撮像されたこれらの画像についての情報が視聴覚コントローラ5107によって記録されている。視聴覚コントローラ5107は、表示情報として、レコーダ5105から当該過去に撮像された画像についての情報を取得することができる。なお、レコーダ5105には、手術に関する各種の情報も事前に記録されていてもよい。 Alternatively, for example, the recorder 5105 records information about these images captured in the past by the audiovisual controller 5107. The audiovisual controller 5107 can acquire information about the previously captured image from the recorder 5105 as display information. In addition, various information about the operation may be recorded in advance in the recorder 5105.
 視聴覚コントローラ5107は、出力先の装置である表示装置5103A~5103Dの少なくともいずれかに、取得した表示情報(すなわち、手術中に撮影された画像や、手術に関する各種の情報)を表示させる。図示する例では、表示装置5103Aは手術室の天井から吊り下げられて設置される表示装置であり、表示装置5103Bは手術室の壁面に設置される表示装置であり、表示装置5103Cは手術室内の机上に設置される表示装置であり、表示装置5103Dは表示機能を有するモバイル機器(例えば、タブレットPC(Personal Computer))である。 The audiovisual controller 5107 causes at least one of the display devices 5103A to 5103D, which is the output destination device, to display the acquired display information (that is, an image taken during the operation and various information related to the operation). In the illustrated example, the display device 5103A is a display device suspended from the ceiling of the operating room, the display device 5103B is a display device installed on the wall surface of the operating room, and the display device 5103C is in the operating room. It is a display device installed on a desk, and the display device 5103D is a mobile device having a display function (for example, a tablet PC (Personal Computer)).
 また、図21では図示を省略しているが、手術室システム5100には、手術室の外部の装置が含まれてもよい。手術室の外部の装置は、例えば、病院内外に構築されたネットワークに接続されるサーバや、医療スタッフが用いるPC、病院の会議室に設置されるプロジェクタ等であり得る。このような外部装置が病院外にある場合には、視聴覚コントローラ5107は、遠隔医療のために、テレビ会議システム等を介して、他の病院の表示装置に表示情報を表示させることもできる。 Further, although not shown in FIG. 21, the operating room system 5100 may include a device outside the operating room. The device outside the operating room may be, for example, a server connected to a network constructed inside or outside the hospital, a PC used by medical staff, a projector installed in a conference room of the hospital, or the like. When such an external device is located outside the hospital, the audiovisual controller 5107 can also display display information on a display device of another hospital via a video conferencing system or the like for telemedicine.
 手術室制御装置5109は、非医療機器における画像表示に関する処理以外の処理を、統括的に制御する。例えば、手術室制御装置5109は、患者ベッド5183、シーリングカメラ5187、術場カメラ5189及び照明5191の駆動を制御する。 The operating room control device 5109 comprehensively controls processing other than processing related to image display in non-medical equipment. For example, the operating room control device 5109 controls the drive of the patient bed 5183, the sealing camera 5187, the operating room camera 5189, and the lighting 5191.
 手術室システム5100には、集中操作パネル5111が設けられており、ユーザは、当該集中操作パネル5111を介して、視聴覚コントローラ5107に対して画像表示についての指示を与えたり、手術室制御装置5109に対して非医療機器の動作についての指示を与えることができる。集中操作パネル5111は、表示装置の表示面上にタッチパネルが設けられて構成される。 The operating room system 5100 is provided with a centralized operation panel 5111, and the user gives an instruction regarding image display to the audiovisual controller 5107 or gives an instruction to the operating room control device 5109 via the centralized operation panel 5111. On the other hand, instructions on the operation of non-medical devices can be given. The centralized operation panel 5111 is configured by providing a touch panel on the display surface of the display device.
 図22は、集中操作パネル5111における操作画面の表示例を示す図である。図22では、一例として、手術室システム5100に、出力先の装置として、2つの表示装置が設けられている場合に対応する操作画面を示している。図22を参照すると、操作画面5193には、発信元選択領域5195と、プレビュー領域5197と、コントロール領域5201と、が設けられる。 FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a display example of an operation screen on the centralized operation panel 5111. FIG. 22 shows, as an example, an operation screen corresponding to a case where the operating room system 5100 is provided with two display devices as output destination devices. Referring to FIG. 22, the operation screen 5193 is provided with a source selection area 5195, a preview area 5197, and a control area 5201.
 発信元選択領域5195には、手術室システム5100に備えられる発信元装置と、当該発信元装置が有する表示情報を表すサムネイル画面と、が紐付けられて表示される。ユーザは、表示装置に表示させたい表示情報を、発信元選択領域5195に表示されているいずれかの発信元装置から選択することができる。 In the source selection area 5195, the source device provided in the operating room system 5100 and the thumbnail screen showing the display information possessed by the source device are linked and displayed. The user can select the display information to be displayed on the display device from any of the source devices displayed in the source selection area 5195.
 プレビュー領域5197には、出力先の装置である2つの表示装置(Monitor1、Monitor2)に表示される画面のプレビューが表示される。図示する例では、1つの表示装置において4つの画像がPinP表示されている。当該4つの画像は、発信元選択領域5195において選択された発信元装置から発信された表示情報に対応するものである。4つの画像のうち、1つはメイン画像として比較的大きく表示され、残りの3つはサブ画像として比較的小さく表示される。ユーザは、4つの画像が表示された領域を適宜選択することにより、メイン画像とサブ画像を入れ替えることができる。また、4つの画像が表示される領域の下部には、ステータス表示領域5199が設けられており、当該領域に手術に関するステータス(例えば、手術の経過時間や、患者の身体情報等)が適宜表示され得る。 In the preview area 5197, a preview of the screen displayed on the two display devices (Monitor1 and Monitor2), which are the output destination devices, is displayed. In the illustrated example, four images are displayed in PinP on one display device. The four images correspond to the display information transmitted from the source device selected in the source selection area 5195. Of the four images, one is displayed relatively large as the main image and the remaining three are displayed relatively small as the sub-image. The user can switch the main image and the sub image by appropriately selecting the area in which the four images are displayed. Further, a status display area 5199 is provided below the area where the four images are displayed, and the status related to the surgery (for example, the elapsed time of the surgery, the physical information of the patient, etc.) is appropriately displayed in the area. obtain.
 コントロール領域5201には、発信元の装置に対して操作を行うためのGUI(Graphical User Interface)部品が表示される発信元操作領域5203と、出力先の装置に対して操作を行うためのGUI部品が表示される出力先操作領域5205と、が設けられる。図示する例では、発信元操作領域5203には、撮像機能を有する発信元の装置におけるカメラに対して各種の操作(パン、チルト及びズーム)を行うためのGUI部品が設けられている。ユーザは、これらのGUI部品を適宜選択することにより、発信元の装置におけるカメラの動作を操作することができる。なお、図示は省略しているが、発信元選択領域5195において選択されている発信元の装置がレコーダである場合(すなわち、プレビュー領域5197において、レコーダに過去に記録された画像が表示されている場合)には、発信元操作領域5203には、当該画像の再生、再生停止、巻き戻し、早送り等の操作を行うためのGUI部品が設けられ得る。 The control area 5201 includes a source operation area 5203 in which GUI (Graphical User Interface) components for operating the source device are displayed, and GUI components for operating the output destination device. Is provided with an output destination operation area 5205 and. In the illustrated example, the source operation area 5203 is provided with GUI components for performing various operations (pan, tilt, zoom) on the camera in the source device having an imaging function. The user can operate the operation of the camera in the source device by appropriately selecting these GUI components. Although not shown, when the source device selected in the source selection area 5195 is a recorder (that is, in the preview area 5197, an image recorded in the past is displayed on the recorder. In the case), the source operation area 5203 may be provided with a GUI component for performing operations such as playing, stopping, rewinding, and fast-forwarding the image.
 また、出力先操作領域5205には、出力先の装置である表示装置における表示に対する各種の操作(スワップ、フリップ、色調整、コントラスト調整、2D表示と3D表示の切り替え)を行うためのGUI部品が設けられている。ユーザは、これらのGUI部品を適宜選択することにより、表示装置における表示を操作することができる。 Further, in the output destination operation area 5205, GUI parts for performing various operations (swap, flip, color adjustment, contrast adjustment, switching between 2D display and 3D display) for the display on the display device which is the output destination device are provided. It is provided. The user can operate the display on the display device by appropriately selecting these GUI components.
 なお、集中操作パネル5111に表示される操作画面は図示する例に限定されず、ユーザは、集中操作パネル5111を介して、手術室システム5100に備えられる、視聴覚コントローラ5107及び手術室制御装置5109によって制御され得る各装置に対する操作入力が可能であってよい。 The operation screen displayed on the centralized operation panel 5111 is not limited to the illustrated example, and the user can use the audiovisual controller 5107 and the operating room control device 5109 provided in the operating room system 5100 via the centralized operation panel 5111. Operational inputs to each device that can be controlled may be possible.
 図23は、以上説明した手術室システムが適用された手術の様子の一例を示す図である。シーリングカメラ5187及び術場カメラ5189は、手術室の天井に設けられ、患者ベッド5183上の患者5185の患部に対して処置を行う術者(医者)5181の手元及び手術室全体の様子を撮影可能である。シーリングカメラ5187及び術場カメラ5189には、倍率調整機能、焦点距離調整機能、撮影方向調整機能等が設けられ得る。照明5191は、手術室の天井に設けられ、少なくとも術者5181の手元を照射する。照明5191は、その照射光量、照射光の波長(色)及び光の照射方向等を適宜調整可能であってよい。 FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of an operation in which the operating room system described above is applied. The ceiling camera 5187 and the operating room camera 5189 are provided on the ceiling of the operating room, and can photograph the hands of the surgeon (doctor) 5181 who treats the affected part of the patient 5185 on the patient bed 5183 and the entire operating room. Is. The sealing camera 5187 and the operating field camera 5189 may be provided with a magnification adjusting function, a focal length adjusting function, a shooting direction adjusting function, and the like. The illumination 5191 is provided on the ceiling of the operating room and illuminates at least the hands of the surgeon 5181. The illumination 5191 may be capable of appropriately adjusting the amount of irradiation light, the wavelength (color) of the irradiation light, the irradiation direction of the light, and the like.
 内視鏡手術システム5113、患者ベッド5183、シーリングカメラ5187、術場カメラ5189及び照明5191は、図21に示すように、視聴覚コントローラ5107及び手術室制御装置5109(図23では図示せず)を介して互いに連携可能に接続されている。手術室内には、集中操作パネル5111が設けられており、上述したように、ユーザは、当該集中操作パネル5111を介して、手術室内に存在するこれらの装置を適宜操作することが可能である。 The endoscopic surgery system 5113, patient bed 5183, sealing camera 5187, operating room camera 5189 and lighting 5191 are via an audiovisual controller 5107 and an operating room control device 5109 (not shown in FIG. 23), as shown in FIG. Are connected so that they can cooperate with each other. A centralized operation panel 5111 is provided in the operating room, and as described above, the user can appropriately operate these devices existing in the operating room through the centralized operation panel 5111.
 以下、内視鏡手術システム5113の構成について詳細に説明する。図示するように、内視鏡手術システム5113は、内視鏡5115と、その他の術具5131と、内視鏡5115を支持する支持アーム装置5141と、内視鏡下手術のための各種の装置が搭載されたカート5151と、から構成される。 Hereinafter, the configuration of the endoscopic surgery system 5113 will be described in detail. As shown, the endoscopic surgery system 5113 includes an endoscope 5115, other surgical tools 5131, a support arm device 5141 that supports the endoscope 5115, and various devices for endoscopic surgery. It is composed of a cart 5151 on which the
 内視鏡手術では、腹壁を切って開腹する代わりに、トロッカ5139a~5139dと呼ばれる筒状の開孔器具が腹壁に複数穿刺される。そして、トロッカ5139a~5139dから、内視鏡5115の鏡筒5117や、その他の術具5131が患者5185の体腔内に挿入される。図示する例では、その他の術具5131として、気腹チューブ5133、エネルギー処置具5135及び鉗子5137が、患者5185の体腔内に挿入されている。また、エネルギー処置具5135は、高周波電流や超音波振動により、組織の切開及び剥離、又は血管の封止等を行う処置具である。ただし、図示する術具5131はあくまで一例であり、術具5131としては、例えば攝子、レトラクタ等、一般的に内視鏡下手術において用いられる各種の術具が用いられてよい。 In endoscopic surgery, instead of cutting the abdominal wall to open the abdomen, a plurality of tubular opening instruments called troccas 5139a to 5139d are punctured into the abdominal wall. Then, the lens barrel 5117 of the endoscope 5115 and other surgical tools 5131 are inserted into the body cavity of the patient 5185 from the troccers 5139a to 5139d. In the illustrated example, as other surgical tools 5131, a pneumoperitoneum tube 5133, an energy treatment tool 5135, and forceps 5137 are inserted into the body cavity of patient 5185. Further, the energy treatment tool 5135 is a treatment tool that cuts and peels tissue, seals a blood vessel, or the like by using a high-frequency current or ultrasonic vibration. However, the surgical tool 5131 shown is only an example, and as the surgical tool 5131, various surgical tools generally used in endoscopic surgery such as a sword and a retractor may be used.
 内視鏡5115によって撮影された患者5185の体腔内の術部の画像が、表示装置5155に表示される。術者5181は、表示装置5155に表示された術部の画像をリアルタイムで見ながら、エネルギー処置具5135や鉗子5137を用いて、例えば患部を切除する等の処置を行う。なお、図示は省略しているが、気腹チューブ5133、エネルギー処置具5135及び鉗子5137は、手術中に、術者5181又は助手等によって支持される。 The image of the surgical site in the body cavity of the patient 5185 taken by the endoscope 5115 is displayed on the display device 5155. While viewing the image of the surgical site displayed on the display device 5155 in real time, the surgeon 5181 uses the energy treatment tool 5135 and forceps 5137 to perform a procedure such as excising the affected area. Although not shown, the pneumoperitoneum tube 5133, the energy treatment tool 5135, and the forceps 5137 are supported by the surgeon 5181 or an assistant during the operation.
 (支持アーム装置)
 支持アーム装置5141は、ベース部5143から延伸するアーム部5145を備える。図示する例では、アーム部5145は、関節部5147a、5147b、5147c、及びリンク5149a、5149bから構成されており、アーム制御装置5159からの制御により駆動される。アーム部5145によって内視鏡5115が支持され、その位置及び姿勢が制御される。これにより、内視鏡5115の安定的な位置の固定が実現され得る。
(Support arm device)
The support arm device 5141 includes an arm portion 5145 extending from the base portion 5143. In the illustrated example, the arm portion 5145 is composed of joint portions 5147a, 5147b, 5147c, and links 5149a, 5149b, and is driven by control from the arm control device 5159. The endoscope 5115 is supported by the arm portion 5145, and its position and posture are controlled. As a result, the stable position of the endoscope 5115 can be fixed.
 (内視鏡)
 内視鏡5115は、先端から所定の長さの領域が患者5185の体腔内に挿入される鏡筒5117と、鏡筒5117の基端に接続されるカメラヘッド5119と、から構成される。図示する例では、硬性の鏡筒5117を有するいわゆる硬性鏡として構成される内視鏡5115を図示しているが、内視鏡5115は、軟性の鏡筒5117を有するいわゆる軟性鏡として構成されてもよい。
(Endoscope)
The endoscope 5115 is composed of a lens barrel 5117 in which a region having a predetermined length from the tip is inserted into the body cavity of the patient 5185, and a camera head 5119 connected to the base end of the lens barrel 5117. In the illustrated example, the endoscope 5115 configured as a so-called rigid mirror having a rigid barrel 5117 is illustrated, but the endoscope 5115 is configured as a so-called flexible mirror having a flexible barrel 5117. May be good.
 鏡筒5117の先端には、対物レンズが嵌め込まれた開口部が設けられている。内視鏡5115には光源装置5157が接続されており、当該光源装置5157によって生成された光が、鏡筒5117の内部に延設されるライトガイドによって当該鏡筒の先端まで導光され、対物レンズを介して患者5185の体腔内の観察対象に向かって照射される。なお、内視鏡5115は、直視鏡であってもよいし、斜視鏡又は側視鏡であってもよい。 The tip of the lens barrel 5117 is provided with an opening in which the objective lens is fitted. A light source device 5157 is connected to the endoscope 5115, and the light generated by the light source device 5157 is guided to the tip of the lens barrel by a light guide extending inside the lens barrel 5117, and is an objective. It is irradiated toward the observation target in the body cavity of the patient 5185 through the lens. The endoscope 5115 may be a direct endoscope, a perspective mirror, or a side endoscope.
 カメラヘッド5119の内部には光学系及び撮像素子が設けられており、観察対象からの反射光(観察光)は当該光学系によって当該撮像素子に集光される。当該撮像素子によって観察光が光電変換され、観察光に対応する電気信号、すなわち観察像に対応する画像信号が生成される。当該画像信号は、RAWデータとしてカメラコントロールユニット(CCU:Camera Control Unit)5153に送信される。なお、カメラヘッド5119には、その光学系を適宜駆動させることにより、倍率及び焦点距離を調整する機能が搭載される。 An optical system and an image sensor are provided inside the camera head 5119, and the reflected light (observation light) from the observation target is focused on the image sensor by the optical system. The observation light is photoelectrically converted by the image sensor, and an electric signal corresponding to the observation light, that is, an image signal corresponding to the observation image is generated. The image signal is transmitted as RAW data to the camera control unit (CCU: Camera Control Unit) 5153. The camera head 5119 is equipped with a function of adjusting the magnification and the focal length by appropriately driving the optical system.
 なお、例えば立体視(3D表示)等に対応するために、カメラヘッド5119には撮像素子が複数設けられてもよい。この場合、鏡筒5117の内部には、当該複数の撮像素子のそれぞれに観察光を導光するために、リレー光学系が複数系統設けられる。 Note that, for example, the camera head 5119 may be provided with a plurality of image pickup elements in order to support stereoscopic viewing (3D display) and the like. In this case, a plurality of relay optical systems are provided inside the lens barrel 5117 in order to guide the observation light to each of the plurality of image pickup elements.
 (カートに搭載される各種の装置)
 CCU5153は、CPU(Central Processing Unit)やGPU(Graphics Processing Unit)等によって構成され、内視鏡5115及び表示装置5155の動作を統括的に制御する。具体的には、CCU5153は、カメラヘッド5119から受け取った画像信号に対して、例えば現像処理(デモザイク処理)等の、当該画像信号に基づく画像を表示するための各種の画像処理を施す。CCU5153は、当該画像処理を施した画像信号を表示装置5155に提供する。また、CCU5153には、図21に示す視聴覚コントローラ5107が接続される。CCU5153は、画像処理を施した画像信号を視聴覚コントローラ5107にも提供する。また、CCU5153は、カメラヘッド5119に対して制御信号を送信し、その駆動を制御する。当該制御信号には、倍率や焦点距離等、撮像条件に関する情報が含まれ得る。当該撮像条件に関する情報は、入力装置5161を介して入力されてもよいし、上述した集中操作パネル5111を介して入力されてもよい。
(Various devices mounted on the cart)
The CCU 5153 is composed of a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), and the like, and comprehensively controls the operations of the endoscope 5115 and the display device 5155. Specifically, the CCU 5153 performs various image processing for displaying an image based on the image signal, such as development processing (demosaic processing), on the image signal received from the camera head 5119. The CCU 5153 provides the display device 5155 with the image signal subjected to the image processing. Further, the audiovisual controller 5107 shown in FIG. 21 is connected to the CCU 5153. CCU5153 also provides the image processed image signal to the audiovisual controller 5107. Further, the CCU 5153 transmits a control signal to the camera head 5119 and controls the driving thereof. The control signal may include information about imaging conditions such as magnification and focal length. The information regarding the imaging condition may be input via the input device 5161 or may be input via the centralized operation panel 5111 described above.
 表示装置5155は、CCU5153からの制御により、当該CCU5153によって画像処理が施された画像信号に基づく画像を表示する。内視鏡5115が例えば4K(水平画素数3840×垂直画素数2160)又は8K(水平画素数7680×垂直画素数4320)等の高解像度の撮影に対応したものである場合、及び/又は3D表示に対応したものである場合には、表示装置5155としては、それぞれに対応して、高解像度の表示が可能なもの、及び/又は3D表示可能なものが用いられ得る。4K又は8K等の高解像度の撮影に対応したものである場合、表示装置5155として55インチ以上のサイズのものを用いることで一層の没入感が得られる。また、用途に応じて、解像度、サイズが異なる複数の表示装置5155が設けられてもよい。 The display device 5155 displays an image based on the image signal processed by the CCU 5153 under the control of the CCU 5153. When the endoscope 5115 is compatible with high-resolution shooting such as 4K (3840 horizontal pixels x 2160 vertical pixels) or 8K (7680 horizontal pixels x 4320 vertical pixels), and / or 3D display. As the display device 5155, a device capable of displaying a high resolution and / or a device capable of displaying in 3D can be used corresponding to each of the above. When a display device 5155 having a size of 55 inches or more is used for high-resolution shooting such as 4K or 8K, a further immersive feeling can be obtained. Further, a plurality of display devices 5155 having different resolutions and sizes may be provided depending on the application.
 光源装置5157は、例えばLED(light emitting diode)等の光源から構成され、術部を撮影する際の照射光を内視鏡5115に供給する。 The light source device 5157 is composed of, for example, a light source such as an LED (light LED diode), and supplies the irradiation light for photographing the surgical site to the endoscope 5115.
 アーム制御装置5159は、例えばCPU等のプロセッサによって構成され、所定のプログラムに従って動作することにより、所定の制御方式に従って支持アーム装置5141のアーム部5145の駆動を制御する。 The arm control device 5159 is composed of a processor such as a CPU, and operates according to a predetermined program to control the drive of the arm portion 5145 of the support arm device 5141 according to a predetermined control method.
 入力装置5161は、内視鏡手術システム5113に対する入力インタフェースである。ユーザは、入力装置5161を介して、内視鏡手術システム5113に対して各種の情報の入力や指示入力を行うことができる。例えば、ユーザは、入力装置5161を介して、患者の身体情報や、手術の術式についての情報等、手術に関する各種の情報を入力する。また、例えば、ユーザは、入力装置5161を介して、アーム部5145を駆動させる旨の指示や、内視鏡5115による撮像条件(照射光の種類、倍率及び焦点距離等)を変更する旨の指示、エネルギー処置具5135を駆動させる旨の指示等を入力する。 The input device 5161 is an input interface for the endoscopic surgery system 5113. The user can input various information and input instructions to the endoscopic surgery system 5113 via the input device 5161. For example, the user inputs various information related to the surgery, such as physical information of the patient and information about the surgical procedure, via the input device 5161. Further, for example, the user gives an instruction to drive the arm portion 5145 via the input device 5161 and an instruction to change the imaging conditions (type of irradiation light, magnification, focal length, etc.) by the endoscope 5115. , Input an instruction to drive the energy treatment tool 5135, and the like.
 入力装置5161の種類は限定されず、入力装置5161は各種の公知の入力装置であってよい。入力装置5161としては、例えば、マウス、キーボード、タッチパネル、スイッチ、フットスイッチ5171及び/又はレバー等が適用され得る。入力装置5161としてタッチパネルが用いられる場合には、当該タッチパネルは表示装置5155の表示面上に設けられてもよい。 The type of the input device 5161 is not limited, and the input device 5161 may be various known input devices. As the input device 5161, for example, a mouse, a keyboard, a touch panel, a switch, a foot switch 5171 and / or a lever and the like can be applied. When a touch panel is used as the input device 5161, the touch panel may be provided on the display surface of the display device 5155.
 あるいは、入力装置5161は、例えばメガネ型のウェアラブルデバイスやHMD(Head Mounted Display)等の、ユーザによって装着されるデバイスであり、これらのデバイスによって検出されるユーザのジェスチャや視線に応じて各種の入力が行われる。また、入力装置5161は、ユーザの動きを検出可能なカメラを含み、当該カメラによって撮像された映像から検出されるユーザのジェスチャや視線に応じて各種の入力が行われる。更に、入力装置5161は、ユーザの声を収音可能なマイクロフォンを含み、当該マイクロフォンを介して音声によって各種の入力が行われる。このように、入力装置5161が非接触で各種の情報を入力可能に構成されることにより、特に清潔域に属するユーザ(例えば術者5181)が、不潔域に属する機器を非接触で操作することが可能となる。また、ユーザは、所持している術具から手を離すことなく機器を操作することが可能となるため、ユーザの利便性が向上する。 Alternatively, the input device 5161 is a device worn by the user, such as a glasses-type wearable device or an HMD (Head Mounted Display), and various inputs are made according to the user's gesture and line of sight detected by these devices. Is done. Further, the input device 5161 includes a camera capable of detecting the movement of the user, and various inputs are performed according to the gesture and the line of sight of the user detected from the image captured by the camera. Further, the input device 5161 includes a microphone capable of picking up the user's voice, and various inputs are performed by voice through the microphone. By configuring the input device 5161 to be able to input various information in a non-contact manner in this way, a user belonging to a clean area (for example, an operator 5181) can operate a device belonging to a dirty area in a non-contact manner. Is possible. In addition, since the user can operate the device without taking his / her hand off the surgical tool he / she has, the convenience of the user is improved.
 処置具制御装置5163は、組織の焼灼、切開又は血管の封止等のためのエネルギー処置具5135の駆動を制御する。気腹装置5165は、内視鏡5115による視野の確保及び術者の作業空間の確保の目的で、患者5185の体腔を膨らめるために、気腹チューブ5133を介して当該体腔内にガスを送り込む。レコーダ5167は、手術に関する各種の情報を記録可能な装置である。プリンタ5169は、手術に関する各種の情報を、テキスト、画像又はグラフ等各種の形式で印刷可能な装置である。 The treatment tool control device 5163 controls the drive of the energy treatment tool 5135 for ablation of tissue, incision, sealing of blood vessels, and the like. The pneumoperitoneum device 5165 gas in the body cavity through the pneumoperitoneum tube 5133 in order to inflate the body cavity of the patient 5185 for the purpose of securing the field of view by the endoscope 5115 and securing the operator's work space. To send. Recorder 5167 is a device capable of recording various information related to surgery. The printer 5169 is a device capable of printing various information related to surgery in various formats such as text, images, and graphs.
 以下、内視鏡手術システム5113において特に特徴的な構成について、更に詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, a particularly characteristic configuration of the endoscopic surgery system 5113 will be described in more detail.
 (支持アーム装置)
 支持アーム装置5141は、基台であるベース部5143と、ベース部5143から延伸するアーム部5145と、を備える。図示する例では、アーム部5145は、複数の関節部5147a、5147b、5147cと、関節部5147bによって連結される複数のリンク5149a、5149bと、から構成されているが、図23では、簡単のため、アーム部5145の構成を簡略化して図示している。実際には、アーム部5145が所望の自由度を有するように、関節部5147a~5147c及びリンク5149a、5149bの形状、数及び配置、並びに関節部5147a~5147cの回転軸の方向等が適宜設定され得る。例えば、アーム部5145は、好適に、6自由度以上の自由度を有するように構成され得る。これにより、アーム部5145の可動範囲内において内視鏡5115を自由に移動させることが可能になるため、所望の方向から内視鏡5115の鏡筒5117を患者5185の体腔内に挿入することが可能になる。
(Support arm device)
The support arm device 5141 includes a base portion 5143 that is a base, and an arm portion 5145 that extends from the base portion 5143. In the illustrated example, the arm portion 5145 is composed of a plurality of joint portions 5147a, 5147b, 5147c and a plurality of links 5149a, 5149b connected by the joint portions 5147b, but in FIG. 23, for simplicity. , The configuration of the arm portion 5145 is shown in a simplified manner. Actually, the shapes, numbers and arrangements of the joint portions 5147a to 5147c and the links 5149a and 5149b, and the direction of the rotation axis of the joint portions 5147a to 5147c are appropriately set so that the arm portion 5145 has a desired degree of freedom. obtain. For example, the arm portion 5145 can be preferably configured to have at least 6 degrees of freedom. As a result, the endoscope 5115 can be freely moved within the movable range of the arm portion 5145, so that the lens barrel 5117 of the endoscope 5115 can be inserted into the body cavity of the patient 5185 from a desired direction. It will be possible.
 関節部5147a~5147cにはアクチュエータが設けられており、関節部5147a~5147cは当該アクチュエータの駆動により所定の回転軸まわりに回転可能に構成されている。当該アクチュエータの駆動がアーム制御装置5159によって制御されることにより、各関節部5147a~5147cの回転角度が制御され、アーム部5145の駆動が制御される。これにより、内視鏡5115の位置及び姿勢の制御が実現され得る。この際、アーム制御装置5159は、力制御又は位置制御等、各種の公知の制御方式によってアーム部5145の駆動を制御することができる。 Actuators are provided in the joint portions 5147a to 5147c, and the joint portions 5147a to 5147c are configured to be rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis by driving the actuator. By controlling the drive of the actuator by the arm control device 5159, the rotation angles of the joint portions 5147a to 5147c are controlled, and the drive of the arm portion 5145 is controlled. Thereby, control of the position and orientation of the endoscope 5115 can be realized. At this time, the arm control device 5159 can control the drive of the arm unit 5145 by various known control methods such as force control or position control.
 例えば、術者5181が、入力装置5161(フットスイッチ5171を含む)を介して適宜操作入力を行うことにより、当該操作入力に応じてアーム制御装置5159によってアーム部5145の駆動が適宜制御され、内視鏡5115の位置及び姿勢が制御されてよい。当該制御により、アーム部5145の先端の内視鏡5115を任意の位置から任意の位置まで移動させた後、その移動後の位置で固定的に支持することができる。なお、アーム部5145は、いわゆるマスタースレイブ方式で操作されてもよい。この場合、アーム部5145は、手術室から離れた場所に設置される入力装置5161を介してユーザによって遠隔操作され得る。 For example, when the operator 5181 appropriately inputs an operation via an input device 5161 (including a foot switch 5171), the arm control device 5159 appropriately controls the drive of the arm portion 5145 in response to the operation input. The position and orientation of the endoscope 5115 may be controlled. By this control, the endoscope 5115 at the tip of the arm portion 5145 can be moved from an arbitrary position to an arbitrary position, and then fixedly supported at the moved position. The arm portion 5145 may be operated by a so-called master slave method. In this case, the arm portion 5145 can be remotely controlled by the user via an input device 5161 installed at a location away from the operating room.
 また、力制御が適用される場合には、アーム制御装置5159は、ユーザからの外力を受け、その外力にならってスムーズにアーム部5145が移動するように、各関節部5147a~5147cのアクチュエータを駆動させる、いわゆるパワーアシスト制御を行ってもよい。これにより、ユーザが直接アーム部5145に触れながらアーム部5145を移動させる際に、比較的軽い力で当該アーム部5145を移動させることができる。従って、より直感的に、より簡易な操作で内視鏡5115を移動させることが可能となり、ユーザの利便性を向上させることができる。 When force control is applied, the arm control device 5159 receives an external force from the user and moves the actuators of the joint portions 5147a to 5147c so that the arm portion 5145 moves smoothly according to the external force. So-called power assist control for driving may be performed. As a result, when the user moves the arm portion 5145 while directly touching the arm portion 5145, the arm portion 5145 can be moved with a relatively light force. Therefore, the endoscope 5115 can be moved more intuitively and with a simpler operation, and the convenience of the user can be improved.
 ここで、一般的に、内視鏡下手術では、スコピストと呼ばれる医師によって内視鏡5115が支持されていた。これに対して、支持アーム装置5141を用いることにより、人手によらずに内視鏡5115の位置をより確実に固定することが可能になるため、術部の画像を安定的に得ることができ、手術を円滑に行うことが可能になる。 Here, in general, in endoscopic surgery, the endoscope 5115 was supported by a doctor called a scopist. On the other hand, by using the support arm device 5141, the position of the endoscope 5115 can be fixed more reliably without human intervention, so that an image of the surgical site can be stably obtained. , It becomes possible to perform surgery smoothly.
 なお、アーム制御装置5159は必ずしもカート5151に設けられなくてもよい。また、アーム制御装置5159は必ずしも1つの装置でなくてもよい。例えば、アーム制御装置5159は、支持アーム装置5141のアーム部5145の各関節部5147a~5147cにそれぞれ設けられてもよく、複数のアーム制御装置5159が互いに協働することにより、アーム部5145の駆動制御が実現されてもよい。 Note that the arm control device 5159 does not necessarily have to be provided on the cart 5151. Further, the arm control device 5159 does not necessarily have to be one device. For example, the arm control device 5159 may be provided at each joint portion 5147a to 5147c of the arm portion 5145 of the support arm device 5141, and a plurality of arm control devices 5159 cooperate with each other to drive the arm portion 5145. Control may be realized.
 (光源装置)
 光源装置5157は、内視鏡5115に術部を撮影する際の照射光を供給する。光源装置5157は、例えばLED、レーザ光源又はこれらの組み合わせによって構成される白色光源から構成される。このとき、RGBレーザ光源の組み合わせにより白色光源が構成される場合には、各色(各波長)の出力強度及び出力タイミングを高精度に制御することができるため、光源装置5157において撮像画像のホワイトバランスの調整を行うことができる。また、この場合には、RGBレーザ光源それぞれからのレーザ光を時分割で観察対象に照射し、その照射タイミングに同期してカメラヘッド5119の撮像素子の駆動を制御することにより、RGBそれぞれに対応した画像を時分割で撮像することも可能である。当該方法によれば、当該撮像素子にカラーフィルタを設けなくても、カラー画像を得ることができる。
(Light source device)
The light source device 5157 supplies the endoscope 5115 with the irradiation light for photographing the surgical site. The light source device 5157 is composed of, for example, an LED, a laser light source, or a white light source composed of a combination thereof. At this time, when a white light source is configured by combining RGB laser light sources, the output intensity and output timing of each color (each wavelength) can be controlled with high accuracy. Therefore, the light source device 5157 white balances the captured image. Can be adjusted. Further, in this case, the laser light from each of the RGB laser light sources is irradiated to the observation target in a time-division manner, and the drive of the image sensor of the camera head 5119 is controlled in synchronization with the irradiation timing to support each of RGB. It is also possible to capture the image in a time-division manner. According to this method, a color image can be obtained without providing a color filter on the image sensor.
 また、光源装置5157は、出力する光の強度を所定の時間ごとに変更するようにその駆動が制御されてもよい。その光の強度の変更のタイミングに同期してカメラヘッド5119の撮像素子の駆動を制御して時分割で画像を取得し、その画像を合成することにより、いわゆる黒つぶれ及び白とびのない高ダイナミックレンジの画像を生成することができる。 Further, the drive of the light source device 5157 may be controlled so as to change the intensity of the output light at predetermined time intervals. By controlling the drive of the image sensor of the camera head 5119 in synchronization with the timing of the change in the light intensity to acquire images in a time-divided manner and synthesizing the images, so-called high dynamic without blackout and overexposure Range images can be generated.
 また、光源装置5157は、特殊光観察に対応した所定の波長帯域の光を供給可能に構成されてもよい。特殊光観察では、例えば、体組織における光の吸収の波長依存性を利用して、通常の観察時における照射光(すなわち、白色光)に比べて狭帯域の光を照射することにより、粘膜表層の血管等の所定の組織を高コントラストで撮影する、いわゆる狭帯域光観察(Narrow Band Imaging)が行われる。あるいは、特殊光観察では、励起光を照射することにより発生する蛍光により画像を得る蛍光観察が行われてもよい。蛍光観察では、体組織に励起光を照射し当該体組織からの蛍光を観察するもの(自家蛍光観察)、又はインドシアニングリーン(ICG)等の試薬を体組織に局注するとともに当該体組織にその試薬の蛍光波長に対応した励起光を照射し蛍光像を得るもの等が行われ得る。光源装置5157は、このような特殊光観察に対応した狭帯域光及び/又は励起光を供給可能に構成され得る。 Further, the light source device 5157 may be configured to be able to supply light in a predetermined wavelength band corresponding to special light observation. In special light observation, for example, by utilizing the wavelength dependence of light absorption in body tissue to irradiate light in a narrow band as compared with the irradiation light (that is, white light) in normal observation, the surface layer of the mucous membrane. So-called narrow band imaging, in which a predetermined tissue such as a blood vessel is photographed with high contrast, is performed. Alternatively, in the special light observation, fluorescence observation in which an image is obtained by fluorescence generated by irradiating with excitation light may be performed. In fluorescence observation, the body tissue is irradiated with excitation light to observe the fluorescence from the body tissue (autofluorescence observation), or a reagent such as indocyanine green (ICG) is locally injected into the body tissue and the body tissue is injected. An excitation light corresponding to the fluorescence wavelength of the reagent may be irradiated to obtain a fluorescence image. The light source device 5157 may be configured to be capable of supplying narrow band light and / or excitation light corresponding to such special light observation.
 (カメラヘッド及びCCU)
 図24を参照して、内視鏡5115のカメラヘッド5119及びCCU5153の機能についてより詳細に説明する。図24は、図23に示すカメラヘッド5119及びCCU5153の機能構成の一例を示すブロック図である。
(Camera head and CCU)
The functions of the camera head 5119 and the CCU 5153 of the endoscope 5115 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing an example of the functional configuration of the camera head 5119 and the CCU 5153 shown in FIG. 23.
 図24を参照すると、カメラヘッド5119は、その機能として、レンズユニット5121と、撮像部5123と、駆動部5125と、通信部5127と、カメラヘッド制御部5129と、を有する。また、CCU5153は、その機能として、通信部5173と、画像処理部5175と、制御部5177と、を有する。カメラヘッド5119とCCU5153とは、伝送ケーブル5179によって双方向に通信可能に接続されている。 Referring to FIG. 24, the camera head 5119 has a lens unit 5121, an imaging unit 5123, a driving unit 5125, a communication unit 5127, and a camera head control unit 5129 as its functions. Further, the CCU 5153 has a communication unit 5173, an image processing unit 5175, and a control unit 5177 as its functions. The camera head 5119 and the CCU 5153 are bidirectionally communicatively connected by a transmission cable 5179.
 まず、カメラヘッド5119の機能構成について説明する。レンズユニット5121は、鏡筒5117との接続部に設けられる光学系である。鏡筒5117の先端から取り込まれた観察光は、カメラヘッド5119まで導光され、当該レンズユニット5121に入射する。レンズユニット5121は、ズームレンズ及びフォーカスレンズを含む複数のレンズが組み合わされて構成される。レンズユニット5121は、撮像部5123の撮像素子の受光面上に観察光を集光するように、その光学特性が調整されている。また、ズームレンズ及びフォーカスレンズは、撮像画像の倍率及び焦点の調整のため、その光軸上の位置が移動可能に構成される。 First, the functional configuration of the camera head 5119 will be described. The lens unit 5121 is an optical system provided at a connection portion with the lens barrel 5117. The observation light taken in from the tip of the lens barrel 5117 is guided to the camera head 5119 and incident on the lens unit 5121. The lens unit 5121 is configured by combining a plurality of lenses including a zoom lens and a focus lens. The optical characteristics of the lens unit 5121 are adjusted so as to collect the observation light on the light receiving surface of the image sensor of the image pickup unit 5123. Further, the zoom lens and the focus lens are configured so that their positions on the optical axis can be moved in order to adjust the magnification and the focus of the captured image.
 撮像部5123は撮像素子によって構成され、レンズユニット5121の後段に配置される。レンズユニット5121を通過した観察光は、当該撮像素子の受光面に集光され、光電変換によって、観察像に対応した画像信号が生成される。撮像部5123によって生成された画像信号は、通信部5127に提供される。 The image pickup unit 5123 is composed of an image pickup element and is arranged after the lens unit 5121. The observation light that has passed through the lens unit 5121 is focused on the light receiving surface of the image sensor, and an image signal corresponding to the observation image is generated by photoelectric conversion. The image signal generated by the imaging unit 5123 is provided to the communication unit 5127.
 撮像部5123を構成する撮像素子としては、例えばCMOS(Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor)タイプのイメージセンサであり、Bayer配列を有するカラー撮影可能なものが用いられる。なお、当該撮像素子としては、例えば4K以上の高解像度の画像の撮影に対応可能なものが用いられてもよい。術部の画像が高解像度で得られることにより、術者5181は、当該術部の様子をより詳細に把握することができ、手術をより円滑に進行することが可能となる。 As the image sensor constituting the image pickup unit 5123, for example, a CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) type image sensor having a Bayer array and capable of color photographing is used. As the image sensor, for example, an image sensor capable of capturing a high-resolution image of 4K or higher may be used. By obtaining the image of the surgical site in high resolution, the surgeon 5181 can grasp the state of the surgical site in more detail, and the operation can proceed more smoothly.
 また、撮像部5123を構成する撮像素子は、3D表示に対応する右目用及び左目用の画像信号をそれぞれ取得するための1対の撮像素子を有するように構成される。3D表示が行われることにより、術者5181は術部における生体組織の奥行きをより正確に把握することが可能になる。なお、撮像部5123が多板式で構成される場合には、各撮像素子に対応して、レンズユニット5121も複数系統設けられる。 Further, the image pickup elements constituting the image pickup unit 5123 are configured to have a pair of image pickup elements for acquiring image signals for the right eye and the left eye corresponding to 3D display, respectively. The 3D display enables the operator 5181 to more accurately grasp the depth of the biological tissue in the surgical site. When the image pickup unit 5123 is composed of a multi-plate type, a plurality of lens units 5121 are also provided corresponding to each image pickup element.
 また、撮像部5123は、必ずしもカメラヘッド5119に設けられなくてもよい。例えば、撮像部5123は、鏡筒5117の内部に、対物レンズの直後に設けられてもよい。 Further, the imaging unit 5123 does not necessarily have to be provided on the camera head 5119. For example, the imaging unit 5123 may be provided inside the lens barrel 5117 immediately after the objective lens.
 駆動部5125は、アクチュエータによって構成され、カメラヘッド制御部5129からの制御により、レンズユニット5121のズームレンズ及びフォーカスレンズを光軸に沿って所定の距離だけ移動させる。これにより、撮像部5123による撮像画像の倍率及び焦点が適宜調整され得る。 The drive unit 5125 is composed of an actuator, and the zoom lens and focus lens of the lens unit 5121 are moved by a predetermined distance along the optical axis under the control of the camera head control unit 5129. As a result, the magnification and focus of the image captured by the imaging unit 5123 can be adjusted as appropriate.
 通信部5127は、CCU5153との間で各種の情報を送受信するための通信装置によって構成される。通信部5127は、撮像部5123から得た画像信号をRAWデータとして伝送ケーブル5179を介してCCU5153に送信する。この際、術部の撮像画像を低レイテンシで表示するために、当該画像信号は光通信によって送信されることが好ましい。手術の際には、術者5181が撮像画像によって患部の状態を観察しながら手術を行うため、より安全で確実な手術のためには、術部の動画像が可能な限りリアルタイムに表示されることが求められるからである。光通信が行われる場合には、通信部5127には、電気信号を光信号に変換する光電変換モジュールが設けられる。画像信号は当該光電変換モジュールによって光信号に変換された後、伝送ケーブル5179を介してCCU5153に送信される。 The communication unit 5127 is composed of a communication device for transmitting and receiving various information to and from the CCU 5153. The communication unit 5127 transmits the image signal obtained from the image pickup unit 5123 as RAW data to the CCU 5153 via the transmission cable 5179. At this time, in order to display the captured image of the surgical site with low latency, it is preferable that the image signal is transmitted by optical communication. At the time of surgery, the surgeon 5181 performs the surgery while observing the condition of the affected area with the captured image, so for safer and more reliable surgery, the moving image of the surgical site is displayed in real time as much as possible. This is because it is required. When optical communication is performed, the communication unit 5127 is provided with a photoelectric conversion module that converts an electric signal into an optical signal. The image signal is converted into an optical signal by the photoelectric conversion module and then transmitted to the CCU 5153 via the transmission cable 5179.
 また、通信部5127は、CCU5153から、カメラヘッド5119の駆動を制御するための制御信号を受信する。当該制御信号には、例えば、撮像画像のフレームレートを指定する旨の情報、撮像時の露出値を指定する旨の情報、並びに/又は撮像画像の倍率及び焦点を指定する旨の情報等、撮像条件に関する情報が含まれる。通信部5127は、受信した制御信号をカメラヘッド制御部5129に提供する。なお、CCU5153からの制御信号も、光通信によって伝送されてもよい。この場合、通信部5127には、光信号を電気信号に変換する光電変換モジュールが設けられ、制御信号は当該光電変換モジュールによって電気信号に変換された後、カメラヘッド制御部5129に提供される。 Further, the communication unit 5127 receives a control signal for controlling the drive of the camera head 5119 from the CCU 5153. The control signal includes, for example, information to specify the frame rate of the captured image, information to specify the exposure value at the time of imaging, and / or information to specify the magnification and focus of the captured image. Contains information about the condition. The communication unit 5127 provides the received control signal to the camera head control unit 5129. The control signal from CCU5153 may also be transmitted by optical communication. In this case, the communication unit 5127 is provided with a photoelectric conversion module that converts an optical signal into an electric signal, and the control signal is converted into an electric signal by the photoelectric conversion module and then provided to the camera head control unit 5129.
 なお、上記のフレームレートや露出値、倍率、焦点等の撮像条件は、取得された画像信号に基づいてCCU5153の制御部5177によって自動的に設定される。つまり、いわゆるAE(Auto Exposure)機能、AF(Auto Focus)機能及びAWB(Auto White Balance)機能が内視鏡5115に搭載される。 The above imaging conditions such as frame rate, exposure value, magnification, focus, etc. are automatically set by the control unit 5177 of CCU5153 based on the acquired image signal. That is, the so-called AE (Auto Exposure) function, AF (Auto Focus) function, and AWB (Auto White Balance) function are mounted on the endoscope 5115.
 カメラヘッド制御部5129は、通信部5127を介して受信したCCU5153からの制御信号に基づいて、カメラヘッド5119の駆動を制御する。例えば、カメラヘッド制御部5129は、撮像画像のフレームレートを指定する旨の情報及び/又は撮像時の露光を指定する旨の情報に基づいて、撮像部5123の撮像素子の駆動を制御する。また、例えば、カメラヘッド制御部5129は、撮像画像の倍率及び焦点を指定する旨の情報に基づいて、駆動部5125を介してレンズユニット5121のズームレンズ及びフォーカスレンズを適宜移動させる。カメラヘッド制御部5129は、更に、鏡筒5117やカメラヘッド5119を識別するための情報を記憶する機能を備えてもよい。 The camera head control unit 5129 controls the drive of the camera head 5119 based on the control signal from the CCU 5153 received via the communication unit 5127. For example, the camera head control unit 5129 controls the drive of the image sensor of the image pickup unit 5123 based on the information to specify the frame rate of the captured image and / or the information to specify the exposure at the time of imaging. Further, for example, the camera head control unit 5129 appropriately moves the zoom lens and the focus lens of the lens unit 5121 via the drive unit 5125 based on the information that the magnification and the focus of the captured image are specified. The camera head control unit 5129 may further have a function of storing information for identifying the lens barrel 5117 and the camera head 5119.
 なお、レンズユニット5121や撮像部5123等の構成を、気密性及び防水性が高い密閉構造内に配置することで、カメラヘッド5119について、オートクレーブ滅菌処理に対する耐性を持たせることができる。 By arranging the configuration of the lens unit 5121, the imaging unit 5123, etc. in a sealed structure having high airtightness and waterproofness, the camera head 5119 can be made resistant to autoclave sterilization.
 次に、CCU5153の機能構成について説明する。通信部5173は、カメラヘッド5119との間で各種の情報を送受信するための通信装置によって構成される。通信部5173は、カメラヘッド5119から、伝送ケーブル5179を介して送信される画像信号を受信する。この際、上記のように、当該画像信号は好適に光通信によって送信され得る。この場合、光通信に対応して、通信部5173には、光信号を電気信号に変換する光電変換モジュールが設けられる。通信部5173は、電気信号に変換した画像信号を画像処理部5175に提供する。 Next, the functional configuration of CCU5153 will be described. The communication unit 5173 is composed of a communication device for transmitting and receiving various information to and from the camera head 5119. The communication unit 5173 receives an image signal transmitted from the camera head 5119 via the transmission cable 5179. At this time, as described above, the image signal can be suitably transmitted by optical communication. In this case, corresponding to optical communication, the communication unit 5173 is provided with a photoelectric conversion module that converts an optical signal into an electric signal. The communication unit 5173 provides the image processing unit 5175 with an image signal converted into an electric signal.
 また、通信部5173は、カメラヘッド5119に対して、カメラヘッド5119の駆動を制御するための制御信号を送信する。当該制御信号も光通信によって送信されてよい。 Further, the communication unit 5173 transmits a control signal for controlling the drive of the camera head 5119 to the camera head 5119. The control signal may also be transmitted by optical communication.
 画像処理部5175は、カメラヘッド5119から送信されたRAWデータである画像信号に対して各種の画像処理を施す。当該画像処理としては、例えば現像処理、高画質化処理(帯域強調処理、超解像処理、NR(Noise reduction)処理及び/又は手ブレ補正処理等)、並びに/又は拡大処理(電子ズーム処理)等、各種の公知の信号処理が含まれる。また、画像処理部5175は、AE、AF及びAWBを行うための、画像信号に対する検波処理を行う。 The image processing unit 5175 performs various image processing on the image signal which is the RAW data transmitted from the camera head 5119. The image processing includes, for example, development processing, high image quality processing (band enhancement processing, super-resolution processing, NR (Noise reduction) processing and / or camera shake correction processing, etc.), and / or enlargement processing (electronic zoom processing). Etc., various known signal processing is included. In addition, the image processing unit 5175 performs detection processing on the image signal for performing AE, AF, and AWB.
 画像処理部5175は、CPUやGPU等のプロセッサによって構成され、当該プロセッサが所定のプログラムに従って動作することにより、上述した画像処理や検波処理が行われ得る。なお、画像処理部5175が複数のGPUによって構成される場合には、画像処理部5175は、画像信号に係る情報を適宜分割し、これら複数のGPUによって並列的に画像処理を行う。 The image processing unit 5175 is composed of a processor such as a CPU or GPU, and the above-mentioned image processing and detection processing can be performed by operating the processor according to a predetermined program. When the image processing unit 5175 is composed of a plurality of GPUs, the image processing unit 5175 appropriately divides the information related to the image signal and performs image processing in parallel by the plurality of GPUs.
 制御部5177は、内視鏡5115による術部の撮像、及びその撮像画像の表示に関する各種の制御を行う。例えば、制御部5177は、カメラヘッド5119の駆動を制御するための制御信号を生成する。この際、撮像条件がユーザによって入力されている場合には、制御部5177は、当該ユーザによる入力に基づいて制御信号を生成する。あるいは、内視鏡5115にAE機能、AF機能及びAWB機能が搭載されている場合には、制御部5177は、画像処理部5175による検波処理の結果に応じて、最適な露出値、焦点距離及びホワイトバランスを適宜算出し、制御信号を生成する。 The control unit 5177 performs various controls related to the imaging of the surgical site by the endoscope 5115 and the display of the captured image. For example, the control unit 5177 generates a control signal for controlling the drive of the camera head 5119. At this time, when the imaging condition is input by the user, the control unit 5177 generates a control signal based on the input by the user. Alternatively, when the endoscope 5115 is equipped with the AE function, the AF function, and the AWB function, the control unit 5177 determines the optimum exposure value, focal length, and the optimum exposure value, depending on the result of the detection processing by the image processing unit 5175. The white balance is calculated appropriately and a control signal is generated.
 また、制御部5177は、画像処理部5175によって画像処理が施された画像信号に基づいて、術部の画像を表示装置5155に表示させる。この際、制御部5177は、各種の画像認識技術を用いて術部画像内における各種の物体を認識する。例えば、制御部5177は、術部画像に含まれる物体のエッジの形状や色等を検出することにより、鉗子等の術具、特定の生体部位、出血、エネルギー処置具5135使用時のミスト等を認識することができる。制御部5177は、表示装置5155に術部の画像を表示させる際に、その認識結果を用いて、各種の手術支援情報を当該術部の画像に重畳表示させる。手術支援情報が重畳表示され、術者5181に提示されることにより、より安全かつ確実に手術を進めることが可能になる。 Further, the control unit 5177 causes the display device 5155 to display the image of the surgical unit based on the image signal that has been image-processed by the image processing unit 5175. At this time, the control unit 5177 recognizes various objects in the surgical site image by using various image recognition techniques. For example, the control unit 5177 detects the shape, color, etc. of the edge of the object included in the surgical site image to detect surgical tools such as forceps, a specific biological part, bleeding, mist when using the energy treatment tool 5135, and the like. Can be recognized. When the display device 5155 displays the image of the surgical site, the control unit 5177 uses the recognition result to superimpose and display various surgical support information on the image of the surgical site. By superimposing the operation support information and presenting it to the operator 5181, it becomes possible to proceed with the operation more safely and surely.
 カメラヘッド5119及びCCU5153を接続する伝送ケーブル5179は、電気信号の通信に対応した電気信号ケーブル、光通信に対応した光ファイバ、又はこれらの複合ケーブルである。 The transmission cable 5179 that connects the camera head 5119 and the CCU 5153 is an electric signal cable that supports electric signal communication, an optical fiber that supports optical communication, or a composite cable thereof.
 ここで、図示する例では、伝送ケーブル5179を用いて有線で通信が行われていたが、カメラヘッド5119とCCU5153との間の通信は無線で行われてもよい。両者の間の通信が無線で行われる場合には、伝送ケーブル5179を手術室内に敷設する必要がなくなるため、手術室内における医療スタッフの移動が当該伝送ケーブル5179によって妨げられる事態が解消され得る。 Here, in the illustrated example, the communication is performed by wire using the transmission cable 5179, but the communication between the camera head 5119 and the CCU 5153 may be performed wirelessly. When the communication between the two is performed wirelessly, it is not necessary to lay the transmission cable 5179 in the operating room, so that the situation where the movement of the medical staff in the operating room is hindered by the transmission cable 5179 can be solved.
 以上、本開示に係る技術が適用され得る手術室システム5100の一例について説明した。なお、ここでは、一例として手術室システム5100が適用される医療用システムが内視鏡手術システム5113である場合について説明したが、手術室システム5100の構成はかかる例に限定されない。例えば、手術室システム5100は、内視鏡手術システム5113に代えて、検査用軟性内視鏡システムや顕微鏡手術システムに適用されてもよい。 The example of the operating room system 5100 to which the technology according to the present disclosure can be applied has been described above. Although the case where the medical system to which the operating room system 5100 is applied is the endoscopic surgery system 5113 has been described here as an example, the configuration of the operating room system 5100 is not limited to such an example. For example, the operating room system 5100 may be applied to an examination flexible endoscopic system or a microsurgery system instead of the endoscopic surgery system 5113.
 <本技術>
 本技術は、以下のような構成にすることができる。
<This technology>
The present technology can be configured as follows.
 (1)
 回路パターンが形成されコイル配置部を有する基板と、
 環状に形成された巻回部と前記巻回部から引き出された一対の接続部とを有し前記巻回部が前記コイル配置部に配置された状態で周方向において並ぶ複数のコイルと、
 前記複数のコイルに対向して位置された環状のマグネットと、
 前記マグネットの前記コイルに対する回転方向における相対的な位置検出を行う磁気検出素子と、
 回転支点とされる支軸とを備え、
 前記コイル配置部の厚み方向における両面がそれぞれ第1の配置面と第2の配置面として形成され、
 前記巻回部が前記第1の配置面に配置され、
 前記磁気検出素子が前記第2の配置面に配置された
 駆動モーター。
(1)
A substrate on which a circuit pattern is formed and having a coil arrangement portion,
A plurality of coils having an annularly formed winding portion and a pair of connecting portions drawn out from the winding portion and arranged in the circumferential direction with the winding portion arranged in the coil arrangement portion.
An annular magnet positioned facing the plurality of coils and
A magnetic detection element that detects the position of the magnet relative to the coil in the rotation direction, and
Equipped with a fulcrum that is used as a rotation fulcrum
Both sides of the coil arrangement portion in the thickness direction are formed as a first arrangement surface and a second arrangement surface, respectively.
The winding portion is arranged on the first arrangement surface,
A drive motor in which the magnetic detection element is arranged on the second arrangement surface.
 (2)
 前記回路パターンに接続端子部が形成され、
 前記接続部の先端部が前記第2の配置面において前記接続端子部に接続された
 前記(1)に記載の駆動モーター。
(2)
A connection terminal is formed in the circuit pattern.
The drive motor according to (1), wherein the tip end portion of the connection portion is connected to the connection terminal portion on the second arrangement surface.
 (3)
 前記接続部が前記コイル配置部の外周面の外側を通り折り返された状態にされた
 前記(2)に記載の駆動モーター。
(3)
The drive motor according to (2) above, wherein the connection portion passes through the outside of the outer peripheral surface of the coil arrangement portion and is folded back.
 (4)
 前記磁気検出素子が周方向において隣り合う前記接続部の間に位置された
 前記(2)又は前記(3)に記載の駆動モーター。
(4)
The drive motor according to (2) or (3), wherein the magnetic detection element is located between adjacent connecting portions in the circumferential direction.
 (5)
 前記支軸を回転可能に支持する軸受が設けられ、
 前記軸受が焼結により形成された
 前記(1)から前記(4)の何れかに記載の駆動モーター。
(5)
A bearing that rotatably supports the support shaft is provided.
The drive motor according to any one of (1) to (4) above, wherein the bearing is formed by sintering.
 (6)
 前記マグネットが取り付けられるベースヨークと前記磁気検出素子が配置される配置孔が形成され前記コイル配置部を挟んで前記マグネットの反対側に位置される対向ヨークとが設けられ、
 前記対向ヨークに取り付けられ前記配置孔を覆う補助ヨークが設けられた
 前記(1)から前記(5)の何れかに記載の駆動モーター。
(6)
A base yoke to which the magnet is attached and an opposing yoke in which an arrangement hole in which the magnetic detection element is arranged are formed and located on the opposite side of the magnet with the coil arrangement portion interposed therebetween are provided.
The drive motor according to any one of (1) to (5) above, wherein an auxiliary yoke is provided which is attached to the facing yoke and covers the arrangement hole.
 (7)
 前記基板として前記コイル配置部から導出され所定の方向に延びる導電部を有するフレキシブルプリント配線板が用いられた
 前記(1)から前記(6)の何れかに記載の駆動モーター。
(7)
The drive motor according to any one of (1) to (6) above, wherein a flexible printed wiring board having a conductive portion derived from the coil arrangement portion and extending in a predetermined direction is used as the substrate.
 (8)
 外筐に対してレンズの光軸に直交する少なくとも一方向へ回動されるレンズユニットと、
 前記レンズユニットを回動させる駆動モーターとを備え、
 前記駆動モーターは、
 回路パターンが形成されコイル配置部を有する基板と、
 環状に形成された巻回部と前記巻回部から引き出された一対の接続部とを有し前記巻回部が前記コイル配置部に配置された状態で周方向において並ぶ複数のコイルと、
 前記複数のコイルに対向して位置された環状のマグネットと、
 前記マグネットの前記コイルに対する回転方向における相対的な位置検出を行う磁気検出素子と、
 回転支点とされる支軸とを備え、
 前記コイル配置部の厚み方向における両面がそれぞれ第1の配置面と第2の配置面として形成され、
 前記巻回部が前記第1の配置面に配置され、
 前記磁気検出素子が前記第2の配置面に配置された
 像ぶれ補正装置。
(8)
A lens unit that is rotated in at least one direction orthogonal to the optical axis of the lens with respect to the outer casing,
It is equipped with a drive motor that rotates the lens unit.
The drive motor
A substrate on which a circuit pattern is formed and having a coil arrangement portion,
A plurality of coils having an annularly formed winding portion and a pair of connecting portions drawn out from the winding portion and arranged in the circumferential direction with the winding portion arranged in the coil arrangement portion.
An annular magnet positioned facing the plurality of coils and
A magnetic detection element that detects the position of the magnet relative to the coil in the rotation direction, and
Equipped with a fulcrum that is used as a rotation fulcrum
Both sides of the coil arrangement portion in the thickness direction are formed as a first arrangement surface and a second arrangement surface, respectively.
The winding portion is arranged on the first arrangement surface,
An image blur correction device in which the magnetic detection element is arranged on the second arrangement surface.
 (9)
 光学像を取り込むレンズ鏡筒と、
 取り込まれた光学像を電気的信号に変換する撮像素子と、
 外筐に対してレンズの光軸に直交する少なくとも一方向へ回動されるレンズユニットと、
 前記レンズユニットを回動させる駆動モーターとを備え、
 前記駆動モーターは、
 回路パターンが形成されコイル配置部を有する基板と、
 環状に形成された巻回部と前記巻回部から引き出された一対の接続部とを有し前記巻回部が前記コイル配置部に配置された状態で周方向において並ぶ複数のコイルと、
 前記複数のコイルに対向して位置された環状のマグネットと、
 前記マグネットの前記コイルに対する回転方向における相対的な位置検出を行う磁気検出素子と、
 回転支点とされる支軸とを備え、
 前記コイル配置部の厚み方向における両面がそれぞれ第1の配置面と第2の配置面として形成され、
 前記巻回部が前記第1の配置面に配置され、
 前記磁気検出素子が前記第2の配置面に配置された
 撮像装置。
(9)
A lens barrel that captures an optical image and
An image sensor that converts the captured optical image into an electrical signal,
A lens unit that is rotated in at least one direction orthogonal to the optical axis of the lens with respect to the outer casing,
It is equipped with a drive motor that rotates the lens unit.
The drive motor
A substrate on which a circuit pattern is formed and having a coil arrangement portion,
A plurality of coils having an annularly formed winding portion and a pair of connecting portions drawn out from the winding portion and arranged in the circumferential direction with the winding portion arranged in the coil arrangement portion.
An annular magnet positioned facing the plurality of coils and
A magnetic detection element that detects the position of the magnet relative to the coil in the rotation direction, and
Equipped with a fulcrum that is used as a rotation fulcrum
Both sides of the coil arrangement portion in the thickness direction are formed as a first arrangement surface and a second arrangement surface, respectively.
The winding portion is arranged on the first arrangement surface,
An imaging device in which the magnetic detection element is arranged on the second arrangement surface.
1 撮像装置
2 外筐
15 像ぶれ補正装置
19 レンズユニット
44 駆動モーター
44A 第1の駆動モーター
44B 第2の駆動モーター
45 ベースヨーク
46 マグネット
47 コイル
48 対向ヨーク
48b 配置孔
50 軸受
51 支軸
52 巻回部
53 接続部
53a 先端部
54 基板
55 コイル配置部
55a 外周面
56 導電部
57 第1の配置面
58 第2の配置面
59 接続端子部
60 磁気検出素子
62 補助ヨーク
44X 駆動モーター
47X コイル
50X 軸受
51X 支軸
52X 巻回部
100 撮像装置
110 撮像素子
1 Image pickup device 2 Outer housing 15 Image blur correction device 19 Lens unit 44 Drive motor 44A First drive motor 44B Second drive motor 45 Base yoke 46 Magnet 47 Coil 48 Opposing yoke 48b Arrangement hole 50 Bearing 51 Support shaft 52 winding Part 53 Connection part 53a Tip part 54 Board 55 Coil placement part 55a Outer peripheral surface 56 Conductive part 57 First placement surface 58 Second placement surface 59 Connection terminal part 60 Magnetic detection element 62 Auxiliary yoke 44X Drive motor 47X Coil 50X Bearing 51X Support shaft 52X Winding unit 100 Imaging device 110 Imaging element

Claims (9)

  1.  回路パターンが形成されコイル配置部を有する基板と、
     環状に形成された巻回部と前記巻回部から引き出された一対の接続部とを有し前記巻回部が前記コイル配置部に配置された状態で周方向において並ぶ複数のコイルと、
     前記複数のコイルに対向して位置された環状のマグネットと、
     前記マグネットの前記コイルに対する回転方向における相対的な位置検出を行う磁気検出素子と、
     回転支点とされる支軸とを備え、
     前記コイル配置部の厚み方向における両面がそれぞれ第1の配置面と第2の配置面として形成され、
     前記巻回部が前記第1の配置面に配置され、
     前記磁気検出素子が前記第2の配置面に配置された
     駆動モーター。
    A substrate on which a circuit pattern is formed and having a coil arrangement portion,
    A plurality of coils having an annularly formed winding portion and a pair of connecting portions drawn out from the winding portion and arranged in the circumferential direction with the winding portion arranged in the coil arrangement portion.
    An annular magnet positioned facing the plurality of coils and
    A magnetic detection element that detects the position of the magnet relative to the coil in the rotation direction, and
    Equipped with a fulcrum that is used as a rotation fulcrum
    Both sides of the coil arrangement portion in the thickness direction are formed as a first arrangement surface and a second arrangement surface, respectively.
    The winding portion is arranged on the first arrangement surface,
    A drive motor in which the magnetic detection element is arranged on the second arrangement surface.
  2.  前記回路パターンに接続端子部が形成され、
     前記接続部の先端部が前記第2の配置面において前記接続端子部に接続された
     請求項1に記載の駆動モーター。
    A connection terminal is formed in the circuit pattern.
    The drive motor according to claim 1, wherein the tip end portion of the connection portion is connected to the connection terminal portion on the second arrangement surface.
  3.  前記接続部が前記コイル配置部の外周面の外側を通り折り返された状態にされた
     請求項2に記載の駆動モーター。
    The drive motor according to claim 2, wherein the connection portion passes through the outside of the outer peripheral surface of the coil arrangement portion and is folded back.
  4.  前記磁気検出素子が周方向において隣り合う前記接続部の間に位置された
     請求項2に記載の駆動モーター。
    The drive motor according to claim 2, wherein the magnetic detection element is located between the connecting portions adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction.
  5.  前記支軸を回転可能に支持する軸受が設けられ、
     前記軸受が焼結により形成された
     請求項1に記載の駆動モーター。
    A bearing that rotatably supports the support shaft is provided.
    The drive motor according to claim 1, wherein the bearing is formed by sintering.
  6.  前記マグネットが取り付けられるベースヨークと前記磁気検出素子が配置される配置孔が形成され前記コイル配置部を挟んで前記マグネットの反対側に位置される対向ヨークとが設けられ、
     前記対向ヨークに取り付けられ前記配置孔を覆う補助ヨークが設けられた
     請求項1に記載の駆動モーター。
    A base yoke to which the magnet is attached and an opposing yoke in which an arrangement hole in which the magnetic detection element is arranged are formed and located on the opposite side of the magnet with the coil arrangement portion interposed therebetween are provided.
    The drive motor according to claim 1, wherein an auxiliary yoke is provided which is attached to the facing yoke and covers the arrangement hole.
  7.  前記基板として前記コイル配置部から導出され所定の方向に延びる導電部を有するフレキシブルプリント配線板が用いられた
     請求項1に記載の駆動モーター。
    The drive motor according to claim 1, wherein a flexible printed wiring board having a conductive portion derived from the coil arrangement portion and extending in a predetermined direction is used as the substrate.
  8.  外筐に対してレンズの光軸に直交する少なくとも一方向へ回動されるレンズユニットと、
     前記レンズユニットを回動させる駆動モーターとを備え、
     前記駆動モーターは、
     回路パターンが形成されコイル配置部を有する基板と、
     環状に形成された巻回部と前記巻回部から引き出された一対の接続部とを有し前記巻回部が前記コイル配置部に配置された状態で周方向において並ぶ複数のコイルと、
     前記複数のコイルに対向して位置された環状のマグネットと、
     前記マグネットの前記コイルに対する回転方向における相対的な位置検出を行う磁気検出素子と、
     回転支点とされる支軸とを備え、
     前記コイル配置部の厚み方向における両面がそれぞれ第1の配置面と第2の配置面として形成され、
     前記巻回部が前記第1の配置面に配置され、
     前記磁気検出素子が前記第2の配置面に配置された
     像ぶれ補正装置。
    A lens unit that is rotated in at least one direction orthogonal to the optical axis of the lens with respect to the outer casing,
    It is equipped with a drive motor that rotates the lens unit.
    The drive motor
    A substrate on which a circuit pattern is formed and having a coil arrangement portion,
    A plurality of coils having an annularly formed winding portion and a pair of connecting portions drawn out from the winding portion and arranged in the circumferential direction with the winding portion arranged in the coil arrangement portion.
    An annular magnet positioned facing the plurality of coils and
    A magnetic detection element that detects the position of the magnet relative to the coil in the rotation direction, and
    Equipped with a fulcrum that is used as a rotation fulcrum
    Both sides of the coil arrangement portion in the thickness direction are formed as a first arrangement surface and a second arrangement surface, respectively.
    The winding portion is arranged on the first arrangement surface,
    An image blur correction device in which the magnetic detection element is arranged on the second arrangement surface.
  9.  光学像を取り込むレンズ鏡筒と、
     取り込まれた光学像を電気的信号に変換する撮像素子と、
     外筐に対してレンズの光軸に直交する少なくとも一方向へ回動されるレンズユニットと、
     前記レンズユニットを回動させる駆動モーターとを備え、
     前記駆動モーターは、
     回路パターンが形成されコイル配置部を有する基板と、
     環状に形成された巻回部と前記巻回部から引き出された一対の接続部とを有し前記巻回部が前記コイル配置部に配置された状態で周方向において並ぶ複数のコイルと、
     前記複数のコイルに対向して位置された環状のマグネットと、
     前記マグネットの前記コイルに対する回転方向における相対的な位置検出を行う磁気検出素子と、
     回転支点とされる支軸とを備え、
     前記コイル配置部の厚み方向における両面がそれぞれ第1の配置面と第2の配置面として形成され、
     前記巻回部が前記第1の配置面に配置され、
     前記磁気検出素子が前記第2の配置面に配置された
     撮像装置。
    A lens barrel that captures an optical image and
    An image sensor that converts the captured optical image into an electrical signal,
    A lens unit that is rotated in at least one direction orthogonal to the optical axis of the lens with respect to the outer casing,
    It is equipped with a drive motor that rotates the lens unit.
    The drive motor
    A substrate on which a circuit pattern is formed and having a coil arrangement portion,
    A plurality of coils having an annularly formed winding portion and a pair of connecting portions drawn out from the winding portion and arranged in the circumferential direction with the winding portion arranged in the coil arrangement portion.
    An annular magnet positioned facing the plurality of coils and
    A magnetic detection element that detects the position of the magnet relative to the coil in the rotation direction, and
    Equipped with a fulcrum that is used as a rotation fulcrum
    Both sides of the coil arrangement portion in the thickness direction are formed as a first arrangement surface and a second arrangement surface, respectively.
    The winding portion is arranged on the first arrangement surface,
    An imaging device in which the magnetic detection element is arranged on the second arrangement surface.
PCT/JP2020/005294 2019-03-29 2020-02-12 Drive motor, image shake correction device, and imaging device WO2020202812A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2021511178A JP7484892B2 (en) 2019-03-29 2020-02-12 DRIVE MOTOR, IMAGE BLUR CORRECTION DEVICE, AND IMAGING APPARATUS

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019067351 2019-03-29
JP2019-067351 2019-03-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020202812A1 true WO2020202812A1 (en) 2020-10-08

Family

ID=72668837

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2020/005294 WO2020202812A1 (en) 2019-03-29 2020-02-12 Drive motor, image shake correction device, and imaging device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP7484892B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2020202812A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009230025A (en) * 2008-03-25 2009-10-08 Tamron Co Ltd Coil drive unit, blur correction mechanism and imaging apparatus
JP2013140284A (en) * 2012-01-05 2013-07-18 Sony Corp Image-blurring correction device and imaging apparatus
JP2018018055A (en) * 2016-07-13 2018-02-01 オリンパス株式会社 Image tremor correction device

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6643720B2 (en) 2016-06-24 2020-02-12 ミツミ電機株式会社 Lens driving device, camera module and camera mounting device
JP2018018021A (en) 2016-07-29 2018-02-01 ミツミ電機株式会社 Lens drive device, camera module, and camera loading device

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009230025A (en) * 2008-03-25 2009-10-08 Tamron Co Ltd Coil drive unit, blur correction mechanism and imaging apparatus
JP2013140284A (en) * 2012-01-05 2013-07-18 Sony Corp Image-blurring correction device and imaging apparatus
JP2018018055A (en) * 2016-07-13 2018-02-01 オリンパス株式会社 Image tremor correction device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP7484892B2 (en) 2024-05-16
JPWO2020202812A1 (en) 2020-10-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6868789B2 (en) Image transfer device, image transfer method, program, moving image generation system
US11640071B2 (en) Lens barrel and imaging apparatus
WO2018020857A1 (en) Solid-state imaging element, imaging device, and method for controlling solid-state imaging element
JP6950706B2 (en) Information processing equipment and methods, and programs
WO2018003305A1 (en) Solid-state imaging element, imaging device, and method for controlling solid-state imaging element
WO2018150768A1 (en) Photometry device, photometry method, program, and imaging device
JP2019083501A (en) Imaging device
JPWO2020100664A1 (en) Image processing equipment, image processing methods, and programs
JPWO2020174865A1 (en) Variable focal length lens system and image pickup device
JP7077557B2 (en) Display control device and display control method
WO2020217874A1 (en) Display control device, display control method, and display control program
WO2018100992A1 (en) Imaging optical system, camera module, and electronic apparatus
WO2020202812A1 (en) Drive motor, image shake correction device, and imaging device
JP7081609B2 (en) Lens device and image pickup device
JP7098526B2 (en) Electronic device and lane state control method for electronic device
JP7405132B2 (en) Lens barrel and imaging device
US11743593B2 (en) Imaging device, imaging signal processing device, and imaging signal processing method to reduce image display delay
WO2022124166A1 (en) Liquid crystal display element, display device, electronic device, driving substrate, and method for manufacturing driving substrate
JPWO2020174866A1 (en) Variable focal length lens system and image pickup device
WO2019082686A1 (en) Imaging device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20782055

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021511178

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20782055

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1